Եզեկիէլ / Ezekiel - 48 |

Text:
< PreviousԵզեկիէլ - 48 Ezekiel - 48Next >

jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
Как храм является источником плодородия будущей уравненной и раздвинутой в своих границах св. земли, так он же и тесно связанный с ним город служит центром ее населения и исходным пунктом для раздела св. земли между коленами. Как идеальная, св. земля будущего представляется правильным удлиненным с с. на ю. квадратком, который восточно-западными параллелями длится на 12: равных участков для колен (последние, как идеальные, представляются одинаковыми и по численности; наоборот Чис XXVI:53-56; XXXIII:54). Место для колена указывается ближе или дальше от священного участка в зависимости от большого или меньшего достоинства его происхождения: природные сыновья Лии и Рахили получают участки ближе к храму, чем сыновья от служанок (Лииной Зелфы и Рахилиной Валлы); непосредственно же окружают храм - соответственно исторической действительности колена Иудино и Вениаминово.

К северу от храма три важнейших Лиина колена (порядок: Рувим, Иуда, Левий уже во Втор XXXIII:7: и д.). к ю. - остальные; верх первых занимает старший сын Рахили, верх вторых - младший сын ее; окраины - рабынины колена; из них подле Лииных старшее колено ее рабыни (Гадово); подле Рахилиных колен тоже колено ее рабыни, Неффалимово - соответственно исторической действительности, как и соседнее с ним Асирово. Самая же большая уступка исторической действительности сделана в том, что храм занимает не самую середину св. земли, а отодвинут ближе к югу (ст. 1-29). (См. чертеж, ст. 2)

По такому же принципу распределены между коленами 12: ворот будущего св. города (ст. 30-35). Лиины колена, расположенные к северу, получают ворота на северной стороне города, южные - на южной. Рахилины колена получают ворота на самой почетной восточной стороне, здесь же имеет ворота и старшее из колен ее рабынь (Даново); младшее (Неффалимово) в диаметрально противоположном углу города (для симметрии). Остающиеся двое ворот западной стены предоставляются коленам от Лииной рабыни. (См. чертеж, ст. 16)

Всем этим указывается на различную степень святости в будущем, новом Израиле, дающей и не одинаковое приближение к Богу и коренящейся в исторических условиях происхождения и развития народа.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
In this chapter we have particular directions given for the distribution of the land, of which we had the metes and bounds assigned in the foregoing chapter. I. The portions of the twelve tribes, seven to the north of the sanctuary (ver. 1-7) and five to the south, ver. 23-29. II. The allotment of land for the sanctuary, and the priests (ver. 8-11), for the Levites (ver. 12-14), for the city (ver. 15-20), and for the prince, ver. 21, 22. Much of this we had before, ch. xlv. III. A plan of the city, its gates, and the new name given to it (ver. 30-35), which seals up, and concludes, the vision and prophecy of this book.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
This chapter contains a description of the several portions of the land belonging to each tribe, together with the portion allotted to the sanctuary, city, suburb, and prince, vv. 1-29; as also the measure and gates of the new city, Eze 48:30-35.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
Eze 48:1, The portions of the twelve tribes; Eze 48:8, of the sanctuary; Eze 48:15, of the city and suburbs; Eze 48:21, and of the prince; Eze 48:23, The portions of the twelve tribes; Eze 48:30, The dimensions and gates of the city.
John Gill
INTRODUCTION TO EZEKIEL 48
In this chapter an account is given of the portions of the twelve tribes in the land of Israel; seven to the north of the sanctuary, Dan, Asher, Naphtali, Manasseh, Ephraim, Reuben, and Judah, Ezek 48:1, between which and Benjamin lay the holy portion of the land, for the sanctuary and the priests of it, and for the Levites, and for the city and its suburbs, and for the prince, Ezek 48:8 then the portions of the other five tribes to the south of the sanctuary, Benjamin, Simeon, Issachar, Zebulun, and Gad, Ezek 48:23, after which the city is described by its outlets, north, east, south, and west; by its twelve gates, three at each point; by its circumference and by its name, Ezek 48:30.
48:148:1: Եւ ա՛յս են սահմանք ցեղիցն. իսկզբանէ կողմանն հիւսւսոյ ըստ կողման զառիթափին, որ զատանէ ընդ մուտս Էմաթու հանգրուանին Աւնանու. սահման Դամասկոսի առ հիւսւսով ըստ կողման բնակութեանն Եմաթայ։ Եւ եղիցի նոցա արեւելակողմ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Դանայ բաժին մի[13093]։ [13093] Ոմանք. Որ զատանէր ընդ մուտսն Եմա՛՛... սահմանն Դամասկոսի առ հիւսւսոյ... նոցա յարեւելակողմն։
1 «Սրանք են ցեղերի սահմանները. հիւսիսից սկսած, զառիթափի կողմով, որ բաժանում է Եմաթի ճանապարհը եւ Աւնանի հանգրուանը, Դամասկոսի հիւսիսային սահմանն է՝ Եմաթի կողմից: Դրանց արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Դանի ցեղին:
48 «Ցեղերուն անունները ասոնք են։ Հիւսիսի ծայրէն՝ Եթլոնի ճամբուն քով դէպի Եմաթ երթալով՝ մինչեւ Ասար–Ենան, որ Դամասկոսի սահմանն է դէպի հիւսիս մինչեւ Եմաթի քով ու արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմուտք Դանին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ այս են [1025]սահմանք ցեղիցն: Ի սկզբանէ կողմանն հիւսիսոյ ըստ կողման զառիթափին, որ զատանէ ընդ մուտս Եմաթու հանգրուանին Աւնանու. սահման Դամասկոսի առ հիւսիսով ըստ կողման բնակութեանն Եմաթայ. եւ եղիցի նոցա`` արեւելակողմ մինչեւ [1026]ի ծովակողմ` Դանայ բաժին մի:

48:1: Եւ ա՛յս են սահմանք ցեղիցն. իսկզբանէ կողմանն հիւսւսոյ ըստ կողման զառիթափին, որ զատանէ ընդ մուտս Էմաթու հանգրուանին Աւնանու. սահման Դամասկոսի առ հիւսւսով ըստ կողման բնակութեանն Եմաթայ։ Եւ եղիցի նոցա արեւելակողմ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Դանայ բաժին մի[13093]։
[13093] Ոմանք. Որ զատանէր ընդ մուտսն Եմա՛՛... սահմանն Դամասկոսի առ հիւսւսոյ... նոցա յարեւելակողմն։
1 «Սրանք են ցեղերի սահմանները. հիւսիսից սկսած, զառիթափի կողմով, որ բաժանում է Եմաթի ճանապարհը եւ Աւնանի հանգրուանը, Դամասկոսի հիւսիսային սահմանն է՝ Եմաթի կողմից: Դրանց արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Դանի ցեղին:
48 «Ցեղերուն անունները ասոնք են։ Հիւսիսի ծայրէն՝ Եթլոնի ճամբուն քով դէպի Եմաթ երթալով՝ մինչեւ Ասար–Ենան, որ Դամասկոսի սահմանն է դէպի հիւսիս մինչեւ Եմաթի քով ու արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմուտք Դանին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:148:1 Вот имена колен. На северном краю по дороге от Хетлона, ведущей в Емаф, Гацар-Енон, от северной границы Дамаска по пути к Емафу: все это от востока до моря один удел Дану.
48:1 καὶ και and; even ταῦτα ουτος this; he τὰ ο the ὀνόματα ονομα name; notable τῶν ο the φυλῶν φυλη tribe ἀπὸ απο from; away τῆς ο the ἀρχῆς αρχη origin; beginning τῆς ο the πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind κατὰ κατα down; by τὸ ο the μέρος μερος part; in particular τῆς ο the καταβάσεως καταβασις descent τοῦ ο the περισχίζοντος περισχιζω in; on τὴν ο the εἴσοδον εισοδος inroad; entrance τῆς ο the Ημαθ ημαθ courtyard; fold τοῦ ο the Αιναν αιναν frontier Δαμασκοῦ δαμασκος Damaskos; Thamaskos πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind κατὰ κατα down; by μέρος μερος part; in particular Ημαθ ημαθ courtyard; fold καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Δαν δαν one; unit
48:1 וְ wᵊ וְ and אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these שְׁמֹ֣ות šᵊmˈôṯ שֵׁם name הַ ha הַ the שְּׁבָטִ֑ים ššᵊvāṭˈîm שֵׁבֶט rod מִ mi מִן from קְצֵ֣ה qᵊṣˈē קָצֶה end צָפֹ֡ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to יַ֣ד yˈaḏ יָד hand דֶּֽרֶךְ־ dˈereḵ- דֶּרֶךְ way חֶתְלֹ֣ן׀ ḥeṯlˈōn חֶתְלֹן Hethlon לְֽ lᵊˈ לְ to בֹוא־ vô- בוא come חֲמָ֡ת ḥᵃmˈāṯ חֲמָת Hamath חֲצַ֣ר עֵינָן֩ ḥᵃṣˈar ʕênān חֲצַר עֵינָן Hazar Enan גְּב֨וּל gᵊvˌûl גְּבוּל boundary דַּמֶּ֤שֶׂק dammˈeśeq דַּמֶּשֶׂק Damascus צָפֹ֨ונָה֙ ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to יַ֣ד yˈaḏ יָד hand חֲמָ֔ת ḥᵃmˈāṯ חֲמָת Hamath וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיוּ־ hāyû- היה be לֹ֧ו lˈô לְ to פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east הַ ha הַ the יָּ֖ם yyˌom יָם sea דָּ֥ן dˌān דָּן Dan אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:1. et haec nomina tribuum a finibus aquilonis iuxta viam Aethlon pergentibus Emath atrium Aenon terminus Damasci ad aquilonem iuxta Emath et erit ei plaga orientalis mare Dan unaAnd these are the names of the tribes from the borders of the north, by the way of Hethalon, as they go to Emath, the court of Enan the border of Damascus northward, by the way off Emath. And from the east side thereof to the sea shall be one portion for Dan.
1. Now these are the names of the tribes: from the north end, beside the way of Hethlon to the entering in of Hamath, Hazer-enan at the border of Damascus, northward beside Hamath; and they shall have their sides east west; Dan, one .
48:1. “And these are the names of the tribes, from the parts of the north, beside the way of Hethlon, continuing on to Hamath, at the entrance of Enon, to the border of Damascus toward the north, beside the way of Hamath. And from the region of the east to the sea, there will be one portion for Dan.
Now these [are] the names of the tribes. From the north end to the coast of the way of Hethlon, as one goeth to Hamath, Hazar- enan, the border of Damascus northward, to the coast of Hamath; for these are his sides east [and] west; a [portion for] Dan:

48:1 Вот имена колен. На северном краю по дороге от Хетлона, ведущей в Емаф, Гацар-Енон, от северной границы Дамаска по пути к Емафу: все это от востока до моря один удел Дану.
48:1
καὶ και and; even
ταῦτα ουτος this; he
τὰ ο the
ὀνόματα ονομα name; notable
τῶν ο the
φυλῶν φυλη tribe
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῆς ο the
ἀρχῆς αρχη origin; beginning
τῆς ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
κατὰ κατα down; by
τὸ ο the
μέρος μερος part; in particular
τῆς ο the
καταβάσεως καταβασις descent
τοῦ ο the
περισχίζοντος περισχιζω in; on
τὴν ο the
εἴσοδον εισοδος inroad; entrance
τῆς ο the
Ημαθ ημαθ courtyard; fold
τοῦ ο the
Αιναν αιναν frontier
Δαμασκοῦ δαμασκος Damaskos; Thamaskos
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
κατὰ κατα down; by
μέρος μερος part; in particular
Ημαθ ημαθ courtyard; fold
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him
τὰ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Δαν δαν one; unit
48:1
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these
שְׁמֹ֣ות šᵊmˈôṯ שֵׁם name
הַ ha הַ the
שְּׁבָטִ֑ים ššᵊvāṭˈîm שֵׁבֶט rod
מִ mi מִן from
קְצֵ֣ה qᵊṣˈē קָצֶה end
צָפֹ֡ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
יַ֣ד yˈaḏ יָד hand
דֶּֽרֶךְ־ dˈereḵ- דֶּרֶךְ way
חֶתְלֹ֣ן׀ ḥeṯlˈōn חֶתְלֹן Hethlon
לְֽ lᵊˈ לְ to
בֹוא־ vô- בוא come
חֲמָ֡ת ḥᵃmˈāṯ חֲמָת Hamath
חֲצַ֣ר עֵינָן֩ ḥᵃṣˈar ʕênān חֲצַר עֵינָן Hazar Enan
גְּב֨וּל gᵊvˌûl גְּבוּל boundary
דַּמֶּ֤שֶׂק dammˈeśeq דַּמֶּשֶׂק Damascus
צָפֹ֨ונָה֙ ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
יַ֣ד yˈaḏ יָד hand
חֲמָ֔ת ḥᵃmˈāṯ חֲמָת Hamath
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיוּ־ hāyû- היה be
לֹ֧ו lˈô לְ to
פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east
הַ ha הַ the
יָּ֖ם yyˌom יָם sea
דָּ֥ן dˌān דָּן Dan
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:1. et haec nomina tribuum a finibus aquilonis iuxta viam Aethlon pergentibus Emath atrium Aenon terminus Damasci ad aquilonem iuxta Emath et erit ei plaga orientalis mare Dan una
And these are the names of the tribes from the borders of the north, by the way of Hethalon, as they go to Emath, the court of Enan the border of Damascus northward, by the way off Emath. And from the east side thereof to the sea shall be one portion for Dan.
1. Now these are the names of the tribes: from the north end, beside the way of Hethlon to the entering in of Hamath, Hazer-enan at the border of Damascus, northward beside Hamath; and they shall have their sides east west; Dan, one .
48:1. “And these are the names of the tribes, from the parts of the north, beside the way of Hethlon, continuing on to Hamath, at the entrance of Enon, to the border of Damascus toward the north, beside the way of Hamath. And from the region of the east to the sea, there will be one portion for Dan.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
1. Размещение колен начинается с севера, на что и указывается в нач. стиха, особ. по LXX: “сия же имена племен от начала еже к северу” (с северного края земли). Вслед за тем повторяется из XLV:15-17: определение северной границы земли, но в очень сокращенном, и по местам до неясности виде: из названных там 7: пунктов приводятся только три важнейших. - “По дороге от Хетлона, ведущей в Емаф, Гацар-Енон”, букв. “до дороги (в направлении) Хетлона, при входе в Емаф, Гацар-Енон”. Не указан исходный пункт северной границы: “от моря” как в XLVII:17: (посему новейшие первое слово переделывают в такое указание). О местоположении городов Хетлон, Емаф, Гацар-Енон см. объяснение XLVII:15-17. LXX “по стране схождения разделяющаго ко входу Имафову двора Енаня” (kata to meroV thV katabasewV tou periscizontoV epi thn eisodon thV 'Hmaq aulhV tou Ailam). “Схождение разделяющего ко входу” тоже, что “сходящего и отделяющего вход” XLVII:15: см. объяснение там (здесь более точное выражение). - “Двора Енаня”, (это вернее, чем греч. ?????) = “дворы Савнани” XLVII:16. Енафов вход представляется ведущим в Гацар-Енон. - “От северной границы Дамаска по пути к Емафу”, букв. “предел Дамаска к северу до Емафа”. Описание границы возвращается назад от Гацар-Енон, самого восточного ее края, чтобы, как в XLVII:17: (такое же, но более пространное выражение), указать сопредельные с будущей св. землей языческие страны, которые не должно включать в нее. LXX: “предел Дамасков к северу по стране (вдоль) о бок с Имафова двора” (может быть, кочевья Емафские, как “дворы Савнани” XLVII:16). - “Все это от востока до моря”, букв. “и будут ему (т. е. Дану, как видно из дальнейшего) граница (пеат) восток - море” (очень сжатое выражение, восполняемое уже LXX: “и будут, греч. '?????, им - мн. ч. - яже на востоки даже до моря”). По-видимому, обращается внимание на большое протяжение коленного удела; в древности ни одно колено не владело такой широкой полосой Ханаана (во всю ширину его); что же касается Данова колена, о котором здесь речь, то оно имело наименьший удел и приютилось подле Иуды, что и побудило его искать места себе на более свободном, не завоеванном еще севере Ханаане и основать там город своего имени, считавшийся потом крайним северным пунктом св. земли (3: Цар III:10: и д.). - “Один удел Дану”, букв. “Дан - один”. LХХ: “Даново едино”.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
1 Now these are the names of the tribes. From the north end to the coast of the way of Hethlon, as one goeth to Hamath, Hazar-enan, the border of Damascus northward, to the coast of Hamath; for these are his sides east and west; a portion for Dan. 2 And by the border of Dan, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Asher. 3 And by the border of Asher, from the east side even unto the west side, a portion for Naphtali. 4 And by the border of Naphtali, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Manasseh. 5 And by the border of Manasseh, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Ephraim. 6 And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even unto the west side, a portion for Reuben. 7 And by the border of Reuben, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Judah. 8 And by the border of Judah, from the east side unto the west side, shall be the offering which ye shall offer of five and twenty thousand reeds in breadth, and in length as one of the other parts, from the east side unto the west side: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it. 9 The oblation that ye shall offer unto the LORD shall be of five and twenty thousand in length, and of ten thousand in breadth. 10 And for them, even for the priests, shall be this holy oblation; toward the north five and twenty thousand in length, and toward the west ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the LORD shall be in the midst thereof. 11 It shall be for the priests that are sanctified of the sons of Zadok; which have kept my charge, which went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites went astray. 12 And this oblation of the land that is offered shall be unto them a thing most holy by the border of the Levites. 13 And over against the border of the priests the Levites shall have five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth: all the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand. 14 And they shall not sell of it, neither exchange, nor alienate the first-fruits of the land: for it is holy unto the LORD. 15 And the five thousand, that are left in the breadth over against the five and twenty thousand, shall be a profane place for the city, for dwelling, and for suburbs: and the city shall be in the midst thereof. 16 And these shall be the measures thereof; the north side four thousand and five hundred, and the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred. 17 And the suburbs of the city shall be toward the north two hundred and fifty, and toward the south two hundred and fifty, and toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty. 18 And the residue in length over against the oblation of the holy portion shall be ten thousand eastward, and ten thousand westward: and it shall be over against the oblation of the holy portion; and the increase thereof shall be for food unto them that serve the city. 19 And they that serve the city shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel. 20 All the oblation shall be five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand: ye shall offer the holy oblation four-square, with the possession of the city. 21 And the residue shall be for the prince, on the one side and on the other of the holy oblation, and of the possession of the city, over against the five and twenty thousand of the oblation toward the east border, and westward over against the five and twenty thousand toward the west border, over against the portions for the prince: and it shall be the holy oblation; and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst thereof. 22 Moreover from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, being in the midst of that which is the prince's, between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince. 23 As for the rest of the tribes, from the east side unto the west side, Benjamin shall have a portion. 24 And by the border of Benjamin, from the east side unto the west side, Simeon shall have a portion. 25 And by the border of Simeon, from the east side unto the west side, Issachar a portion. 26 And by the border of Issachar, from the east side unto the west side, Zebulun a portion. 27 And by the border of Zebulun, from the east side unto the west side, Gad a portion. 28 And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward, the border shall be even from Tamar unto the waters of strife in Kadesh, and to the river toward the great sea. 29 This is the land which ye shall divide by lot unto the tribes of Israel for inheritance, and these are their portions, saith the Lord GOD. 30 And these are the goings out of the city on the north side, four thousand and five hundred measures.
We have here a very short and ready way taken for the dividing of the land among the twelve tribes, not so tedious and so far about as the way that was taken in Joshua's time; for in the distribution of spiritual and heavenly blessings there is not that danger of murmuring and quarrelling that there is in the participation of the temporal blessings. When God gave to the labourers every one his penny those that were uneasy at it were soon put to silence with, May I not do what I will with my own? And such is the equal distribution here among the tribes. In this distribution of the land we may observe, 1. That it differs very much from the division of it in Joshua's time, and agrees not with the order of their birth, nor with that of their blessing by Jacob or Moses. Simeon here is not divided in Jacob, nor is Zebulun a haven of ships, a plain intimation that it is not so much to be understood literally as spiritually, though the mystery of it is very much hidden from us. In gospel times old things have passed away; behold, all things have become new. The Israel of God is cast into a new method. 2. That the tribe of Dan, which was last provided for in the first division of Canaan (Josh. xix. 40), is first provided for here, v. 1. Thus in the gospel the last shall be first, Matt. xix. 30. God, in the dispensation of his grace, does not follow the same method that he does in the disposals of his providence. But Dan had now his portion thereabouts where he had only one city before, northward, on the border of Damascus, and furthest of all from the sanctuary, because that tribe had revolted to idolatry. 3. That all the ten tribes that were carried away by the king of Assyria, as well as the two tribes that were long afterwards carried to Babylon, have their allotment in this visionary land, which some think had its accomplishment in the particular persons and families of those tribes who returned with Judah and Benjamin, of which we find many instances in Ezra and Nehemiah; and it is probable that there were returns of many more afterwards at several times, which are not recorded; and the Jews having Galilee, and other parts, that had been the possessions of the ten tribes, put into their hands, in common with them, they enjoyed them. Grotius says, If the ten tribes had repented and returned to God, as the chief fathers of Judah and Benjamin did, and the priests and Levites (Ezra i. 5), they would have fared as those two tribes did, but they forfeited the benefit of this glorious prophecy by sin. However, we believe it has its designed accomplishment in the establishment and enlargement of the gospel church, and the happy settlement of all those who are Israelites indeed in the sure and sweet enjoyment of the privileges of the new covenant, in which there is enough for all and enough for each. 4. That every tribe in this visionary distribution had its particular lot assigned it by a divine appointment; for it was never the intention of the gospel to pluck up the hedge of property and lay all in common; it was in a way of charity, not of legal right, that the first Christians had all things common (Acts ii. 44), and many precepts of the gospel suppose that every man should know his own. We must not only acknowledge, but acquiesce in, the hand of God appointing us our lot, and be well pleased with it, believing it fittest for us. He shall choose our inheritance for us, Ps. xlvii. 4. 5. That the tribes lay contiguous. By the border of one tribe was the portion of another, all in a row, in exact order, so that, like stones in an arch, they fixed, and strengthened, and wedged in one another. Behold how good and how pleasant a thing it is for brethren thus to dwell together! It was a figure of the communion of churches and saints under the gospel-government; thus, though they are many, yet they are one, and should hold together in holy love and mutual assistance. 6. That the lot of Reuben, which before lay at a distance beyond Jordan, now lies next to Judah, and next but one to the sanctuary; for the scandal he lay under, for which he was told he should not excel, began by this time to wear off. What has turned to the reproach of any person or people ought not to be remembered for ever, but should at length be kindly forgotten. 7. That the sanctuary was in the midst of them. There were seven tribes to the north of it and the Levites, the prince's, and the city's portion, with that of five tribes more, to the south of it; so that it was, as it ought to be, in the heart of the kingdom, that it might diffuse its benign influences to the whole, and might be the centre of their unity. The tribes that lay most remote from each other would meet there in a mutual acquaintance and fellowship. Those of the same parish or congregation, though dispersed, and having no occasion otherwise to know each other, yet by meeting statedly to worship God together should have their hearts knit to each other in holy love. 8. That where the sanctuary was the priests were: For them, even for the priests, shall this holy oblation be, v. 10. As, on the one hand, this denotes honour and comfort to ministers, that what is given for their support and maintenance is reckoned a holy oblation to the Lord, so it intimates their duty, which is that, since they are appointed and maintained for the service of the sanctuary, they ought to attend continually to this very thing, to reside on their cures. Those that live upon the altar must serve at the altar, not take the wages to themselves and devolve the work upon others; but how can they serve the altar, his altar they live upon, if they do not live near it? 9. Those priests had the priests' share of these lands that had approved themselves faithful to God in times of trial (v. 11): It shall be for the sons of Zadok, who, it seems, had signalized themselves in some critical juncture, and went not astray when the children of Israel, and the other Levites, went astray. God will put honour upon those who keep their integrity in times of general apostasy, and he has special favours in reserve for them. Those are swimming upwards, and so they will find at last, that are swimming against the stream. 10. The land which was appropriated to the ministers of the sanctuary might by no means be alienated. It was in the nature of the first-fruits of the land, and was therefore holy to the Lord; and, though the priests and Levites had both the use of it and the inheritance of it to them and their heirs, yet they might not sell it nor exchange it, v. 14. It is sacrilege to convert that to other uses which is dedicated to God. 11. The land allotted for the city and its suburbs is called a profane place (v. 15), or common; not but that the city was a holy city above other cities, for the Lord was there, but, in comparison with the sanctuary, it was a profane place. Yet it is too often true in the worst sense that great cities, even those which, like this, have the sanctuary near them, are profane places, and it ought to be deeply lamented. It was the complaint of old, From Jerusalem has profaneness gone forth into all the land, Jer. xxiii. 15. 12. The city is made to be exactly square, and the suburbs extending themselves equally on all sides, as the Levites' cities did in the first division of the land (v. 16, 17), which, never being literally fulfilled in any city, intimates that it is to be understood spiritually of the beauty and stability of the gospel church, that city of the living God, which is formed according to the wisdom and counsel of God, and is made firm and immovable by his promise. 13. Whereas, before, the inhabitants of Jerusalem were principally of Judah and Benjamin, in whose tribe it lay, now the head city lies not in the particular lot of any of the tribes, but those that serve the city, and bear office in it, shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel, v. 19. The most eminent men must be picked out of all the tribes of Israel for the service of the city, because many eyes were upon it, and there was great resort to it from all parts of the nation and from other nations. Those that live in the city are said to serve the city, for, wherever we are, we must study to be serviceable to the place, some way or other, according as our capacity is. They must not come out of the tribes of Israel to the city to take their ease, and enjoy their pleasures, but to serve the city, to do all the good they can there, and in so doing they would have a good influence upon the country too. 14. Care was taken that those who applied themselves to public business in the city, as well as in the sanctuary, should have an honourable comfortable maintenance; lands are appointed, the increase whereof shall be food unto those that serve the city, v. 18. Who goes a warfare at his own charges? Magistrates, that attend the service of the state, as well as ministers, that attend the service of the church, should have all due encouragement and support in so doing; and for this cause pay we tribute also. 15. The prince had a lot for himself, suited to the dignity of his high station (v. 21); we took an account of it before, ch. xlv. He was seated near the sanctuary, where the testimony of Israel was, and near the city, where the thrones of judgment were, that he might be a protection to both and might see the that duty of both was carefully and faithfully done; and herein he was a minister of God for good to the whole community. Christ is the church's prince, that defends it on every side, and creates a defense; nay, he is himself a defence upon all its glory and encompasses it with his favour. 16. As Judah had his lot next the sanctuary on one side, so Benjamin had, of all the tribes, his lot nearest to it on the other side, which honour was reserved for those who adhered to the house of David and the temple at Jerusalem when the other ten tribes went astray from both. It is enough if treachery and apostasy, upon repentance, he pardoned, but constancy and fidelity shall be rewarded and preferred.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:1: Now these are the names of the tribes - See the division mentioned Num 34:7-12, which casts much light upon this.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:1: The distribution of the holy land is seen in detail throughout Ezek. 48. The order of the original occupation by the tribes under Joshua is partly, but only partly, followed. It is a new order of things - and its ideal character is evinced as elsewhere, by exact and equal measurements. From north to south seven tribes succeed each other. Then comes a portion, separated as an offering to the Lord, subdivided into:
(1) a northern portion for the Levites,
(2) a central portion for the priests and the temple,
(3) a southern portion for the city and those who serve it.
These three form a square, which does not occupy the whole breadth of the land, but is flanked on either side, east and west, by portions assigned to the prince. Then follow, south of the city, five portions for the five remaining tribes - similar to those assigned to the seven. Thus the Levites, the temple, and city, are guarded by Judah and Benjamin, the two tribes who had throughout preserved their allegiance to the true sovereignty of Yahweh, and thus the plan expresses the presence of Yahweh among His people, summed up in the name of the city, with which Ezekiel's prophecy closes, the Lord is there.
The breadth of the portions is not given, but since the exact breadth of the oblation was about 30 geog. miles (Eze 45:1 note), and seven tribes were between the entrance of Hamath and the oblation, the "breadth of one portion" was about 17 geog. miles. The breadth of the Levites' portion and of the priests' portion was in each case about 15 geog. miles. Ain-el-Weibeh, if Kadesh, ( (?), see Num 13:26) would be very nearly the southern border.
The general lines of existing features are followed with considerable fidelity, but accommodation is made to give the required symbolic expression. "Dan" had originally an allotment west of Benjamin, but having colonized and given its name to Laish in the north, was regarded as the most northern occupant of Canaan Jdg 18:29. "Zebulun and Issachar" are removed to the south to make room for the second half of "Manasseh" brought over from the east of Jordan. "Reuben," brought over from the east, is placed between "Ephraim and Judah." "Benjamin" comes immediately south of the city, and "Gad" is brought over from the east to the extreme south.
See map, The Land of Israel
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:1: the names: Exo 1:1-5; Num 1:5-15, Num 13:4-15; Rev 7:4-8
From: Eze 47:15-17; Num 34:7-9
a portion: Heb. one portion
Dan: Gen 30:3-6; Jos 19:40-47; Jdg 18:26-29; Sa2 24:2; Kg1 12:28, Kg1 12:29; Mat 20:15, Mat 20:16
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
48:1
The division of the land, like the definition of the boundaries (Ezek 47:15), commences in the north, and enumerates the tribes in the order in which they were to receive their inheritances from north to south: first, seven tribes from the northern boundary to the centre of the land (Ezek 48:1-7), where the heave for the sanctuary, with the land of the priests and Levites and the city domain, together with the prince's land on the two sides, was to be set apart (Ezek 48:8-22; and secondly, the other five tribes from this to the southern boundary (Ezek 48:23-29). Compare the map on Plate IV.
Ezek 48:1. And these are the names of the tribes: from the north end by the side of the way to Chetlon toward Hamath (and) Hazar-Enon the boundary of Damascus - toward the north by the side of Hamath there shall east side, west side belong to him: Dan one (tribe-lot). Ezek 48:2. And on the boundary of Dan from the east side to the west side: Asher one. Ezek 48:3. And on the boundary of Asher from the east side to the west side: Naphtali one. Ezek 48:4. And on the boundary of Naphtali from the east side to the west side: Manasseh one. Ezek 48:5. And on the boundary of Manasseh from the east side to the west side: Ephraim one. Ezek 48:6. And on the boundary of Ephraim from the east side to the west side: Reuben one. Ezek 48:7. And on the boundary of Reuben from the east side to the west side: Judah one. Ezek 48:8. And on the boundary of Judah from the east side to the west side shall be the heave, which ye shall lift (heave) off, five and twenty thousand (rods) in breadth, and the length like every tribe portion from the east side to the west side; and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it. Ezek 48:9. The heave which ye shall lift (heave) for Jehovah shall be five and twenty thousand in length and ten thousand in breadth. Ezek 48:10. And to these shall the holy heave belong, to the priests, toward the north, five and twenty thousand; toward the west, breadth ten thousand; toward the east, breadth ten thousand; and toward the south, length five and twenty thousand; and the sanctuary of Jehovah shall be in the middle of it. Ezek 48:11. To the priests, whoever is sanctified of the sons of Zadok, who have kept my charge, who have not strayed with the straying of the sons of Israel, as the Levites have strayed, Ezek 48:12. To them shall a portion lifted off belong from the heave of the land; a most holy beside the territory of the Levites. Ezek 48:13. And the Levites (shall receive) parallel with the territory of the priests five and twenty thousand in length, and in breadth ten thousand; the whole length five and twenty thousand, and (the whole) breadth ten thousand. Ezek 48:14. And they shall not sell or exchange any of it, nor shall the first-fruit of the land pass to others; for it is holy to Jehovah. Ezek 48:15. And the five thousand which remain in the breadth along the five and twenty thousand are common land for the city for dwellings and for open space; and the city shall be in the centre of it. Ezek 48:16. And these are its measures: the north side four thousand five hundred, the south side four thousand five hundred, the east side four thousand five hundred, and the west side four thousand five hundred. Ezek 48:17. And the open space of the city shall be toward the north two hundred and fifty, toward the south two hundred and fifty, toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty. Ezek 48:18. And the remainder in length parallel with the holy heave, ten thousand toward the east and ten thousand toward the west, this shall be beside the holy heave, and its produce shall serve the workmen of the city for food. Ezek 48:19. And as for the workmen of the city, they shall cultivate it from all the tribes. Ezek 48:20. The whole of the heave is five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand; a fourth of the holy heave shall ye take for the possession of the city. Ezek 48:21. And the remainder shall belong to the prince on this side and on that side of the holy heave and of the city possession; along the five and twenty thousand of the heave to the eastern boundary, and toward the west along the five and twenty thousand to the western boundary parallel with the tribe portions, it shall belong to the prince; and the holy heave and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst. Ezek 48:22. Thus from the possession of the Levites (as) from the possession of the city shall that which lies in the midst of what belongs to the prince between the territory of Judah and the territory of Benjamin belong to the prince. Ezek 48:23. And the rest of the tribes are from the east side to the west side: Benjamin one. Ezek 48:24. And on the boundary of Benjamin from the east side to the west side: Simeon one. Ezek 48:25. And on the boundary of Simeon from the east side to the west side: Issachar one. Ezek 48:26. And on the boundary of Issachar from the east side to the west side: Zebulon one. Ezek 48:27. And on the boundary of Zebulon from the east side to the west side: Gad one. Ezek 48:28. And on the boundary of Gad on the south side toward the south, the boundary shall be from Tamar to the water of strife from Kadesh along the brook to the great sea. Ezek 48:29. This is the land which ye shall divide by lot for inheritance to the tribes of Israel; these are their portions, is the saying of the Lord Jehovah.
The new division of the land differs from the former one effected in the time of Joshua, in the first place, in the fact that all the tribe-portions were to extend uniformly across the entire breadth of the land from the eastern boundary to the Mediterranean Sea on the west, so that they were to form parallel tracts of country; whereas in the distribution made in the time of Joshua, several of the tribe-territories covered only half the breadth of the land. For example, Dan received his inheritance on the west of Benjamin; and the territories of half Manasseh and Asher ran up from the northern boundary of Ephraim to the northern boundary of Canaan; while Issachar, Naphtali, and Zebulon received their portions on the east of these; and lastly, Simeon received his possession within the boundaries of the tribe of Judah. And secondly, it also differs from the former, in the fact that not only are all the twelve tribes located in Canaan proper, between the Jordan and the Mediterranean Sea; whereas previously two tribes and a half had received from Moses, at their own request, the conquered land of Bashan and Gilead on the eastern side of the Jordan, so that the land of Canaan could be divided among the remaining nine tribes and a half. But besides this, the central tract of land, about the fifth part of the whole, was separated for the holy heave, the city domain, and the prince's land, so that only the northern and southern portions, about four-fifths of the whole, remained for distribution among the twelve tribes, seven tribes receiving their hereditary portions to the north of the heave and five to the south, because the heave was so selected that the city with its territory lay near the ancient Jerusalem. - In Ezek 48:1-7 the seven tribes which were to dwell on the north of the heave are enumerated. The principal points of the northern boundary, viz., the way to Chetlon and Hazar-Enon, the boundary of Damascus, are repeated in Ezek 48:1 from Ezek 47:15, Ezek 47:17, as the starting and terminal points of the northern boundary running from west to east. The words אל־יד חמת fix the northern boundary more precisely in relation to the adjoining territory; and in 'והיוּ the enumeration of the tribe-lots begins with that of the tribe of Dan, which was to receive its territory against the northern boundary. לו refers to the name דּן which follows, and which Ezekiel already had in his mind. פּאת קדים היּם is constructed asyndetôs; and פּאת is to be repeated in thought before היּם: the east side (and) the west (side) are to belong to it, i.e., the tract of land toward its west and its east side. The words which follow, דּן אחד, are attached in an anacoluthistic manner: "Dan (is to receive) one portion," for "one shall belong to Dan." To אחד we are to supply in thought the substantive חבל, tribe-lot, according to Ezek 47:13. "The assumption that one tribe was to receive as much as another (vid., Ezek 47:14), leads to the conclusion that each tribe-lot was to be taken as a monas" (Kliefoth). In this way the names in Ezek 48:2-7, with the constantly repeated אחד, must also be taken. The same form of description is repeated in Ezek 48:23-28 in the case of the five tribes placed to the south of the heave. - In the order of the several tribe-territories it is impossible to discover any universal principle of arrangement. All that is clear is, that in the case of Dan, Asher, Naphtali, Manasseh, and Ephraim, regard is had to the former position of these tribe-territories as far as the altered circumstances allowed. In the time of the Judges a portion of the Danites had migrated to the north, conquered the city of Laish, and given it the name of Dan, so that from that time forward Dan is generally named as the northern boundary of the land (e.g., as early as 2Kings 3:10, and in other passages). Accordingly Dan receives the tract of land along the northern boundary. Asher and Naphtali, which formerly occupied the most northerly portions of the land, follow next. Then comes Manasseh, as half Manasseh had formerly dwelt on the east of Naphtali; and Ephraim joins Manasseh, as it formerly joined the western half of Manasseh. The reason for placing Reuben between Ephraim and Judah appears to be, that Reuben was the first-born of Jacob's sons. The position of the termuah between Judah and Benjamin is probably connected with the circumstance that Jerusalem formerly stood on the boundary of these two tribes, and so also in the future was to skirt Benjamin with its territory. The other tribes had then to be located on the south of Benjamin; Simeon, whose territory formerly lay to the south; Issachar and Zebulon, for which no room was left in the north; and Gad, which had to be brought over from Gilead to Canaan.
In Ezek 48:8-22, the terumah, which has already been described in Ezek 45:1-7 for a different purpose, is more precisely defined: first of all, in Ezek 48:8, according to its whole extent - viz. twenty-five thousand rods in breadth (from north to south), and the length the same as any one (= every one) of the tribe-lots, i.e., reaching from the Jordan to the Mediterranean Sea (cf. Ezek 45:7). In the centre of this separated territory the sanctuary (the temple) was to stand. בּתוכו, the suffix of which refers ad sensum to חלק instead of תּרוּמה, has not the indefinite meaning "therein," but signifies "in the centre;" for the priests' portion, in the middle of which the temple was to stand, occupied the central position between the portion of the Levites and the city possession, as is evident from Ezek 48:22. The circumstance that here, as in Ezek 45:1., in the division of the terumah, the priests' portion is mentioned first, then the portion of the Levites, and after this the city possession, proves nothing so far as the local order in which these three portions followed one another is concerned; but the enumeration is regulated by their spiritual significance, so that first of all the most holy land for the temple and priests is defined, then the holy portion of the Levites, and lastly, the common land for the city. The command, that the sanctuary is to occupy the centre of the whole terumah, leads to a more minute description in the first place (Ezek 48:9-12) of the priests' portion, in which the sanctuary was situated, than of the heave to be lifted off for Jehovah. In Ezek 48:10, לאלּה, which stands at the head, is explained by לכּהנים which follows. The extent of this holy terumah on all four sides is then given; and lastly, the command is repeated, that the sanctuary of Jehovah is to be in the centre of it. In Ezek 48:11, המקדּשׁ is rendered in the plural by the lxx, Chald. and Syr., and is taken in a distributive sense by Kimchi and others: to the priests whoever is sanctified of the sons of Zadok. This is required by the position of the participle between לכּהנים and מבּני צדוק (compare 2Chron 26:18, and for the singular of the participle after a previous plural, Ps 8:9). The other rendering, "for the priests is it sanctified, those of the sons of Zadok," is at variance not only with the position of the words, but also with the fact, namely, that the assignment to the priests of a heave set apart for Jehovah is never designated as קדּשׁ, and from the nature of the case could not be so designated. The apodosis to Ezek 48:11 follows in Ezek 48:12, where לכּהנים is resumed in להם. תּרוּמיּה is an adjective formation derived from תּרוּמה, with the signification of an abstract: that which is lifted (the lifting) from the heave, as it were "a terumah in the second potency" (for these formations, see Ewald, 164 and 165). This terumiyah is called most holy, in contrast with the Levites' portion of the terumah, which was קדשׁ (Ezek 48:14). The priests' portion is to be beside the territory of the Levites, whether on the southern or northern side cannot be gathered from these words any more than from the definition in Ezek 48:13 : "and the Levites beside (parallel with) the territory of the priests." Both statements simply affirm that the portions of the priests and Levites were to lie side by side, and not to be separated by the town possession. - Ezek 48:13 and Ezek 48:14 treat of the Levites' portion: Ezek 48:13, of its situation and extent; Ezek 48:14, of its law of tenure. The seemingly tautological repetition of the measurement of the length and breadth, as "all the length and the breadth," is occasioned by the fact "that Ezekiel intends to express himself more briefly here, and not, as in Ezek 48:10, to take all the four points of the compass singly; in 'all the length' he embraces the two long sides of the oblong, and in '(all) the breadth' the two broad sides, and affirms that 'all the length,' i.e., of both the north and south sides, is to be twenty-five thousand rods, and 'all the breadth,' i.e., of both the east and west sides, is to be ten thousand rods" (Kliefoth). Hitzig has missed the sense, and therefore proposes to alter the text. With regard to the possession of the Levites, the instructions given in Lev 25:34 for the field of the Levites' cities - namely, that none of it was to be sold - are extended to the whole of the territory of the Levites: no part of it is to be alienated by sale or barter. And the character of the possession is assigned as the reason: the first-fruit of the land, i.e., the land lifted off (separated) as first-fruit, is not to pass into the possession of others, because as such it is holy to the Lord. The Chetib ya`abowr יעבור is the correct reading: to pass over, sc. to others, to non-Levites.
Ezek 48:15-18 treat of the city possession. As the terumah was twenty-five thousand rods in breadth (Ezek 48:8), after measuring off ten thousand rods in breadth for the priests and ten thousand rods in breadth for the Levites from the entire breadth, there still remain five thousand rods על, in front of, i.e., along, the long side, which was twenty-five thousand rods. This remnant was to be חל, i.e., common (not holy) land for the city (Jerusalem). למושׁב, for dwelling-places, i.e., for building dwelling-houses upon; and למגרשׁ, for open space, the precinct around the city. The city was to stand in the centre of this oblong. Ezek 48:16 gives the size of the city: on each of the four sides, four thousand five hundred rods (the חמשׁ, designated by the Masoretes as כתיב ולא קרי, has crept into the text through a copyist's error); and Ezek 48:17, the extent of the open space surrounding it: on each side two hundred and fifty rods. This gives for the city, together with the open space, a square of five thousand rods on every side; so that the city with its precinct filled the entire breadth of the space left for it, and there only remained on the east and west an open space of ten thousand rods in length and five thousand rods in breadth along the holy terumah. This is noticed in Ezek 48:18; its produce was to serve for bread, i.e., for maintenance, for the labourers of the city (the masculine suffix in תּבוּאתה refers grammatically to הנּותר). By עבדי העיר Hitzig would understand the inhabitants of the city, because one cultivates a piece of land even by dwelling on it. But this use of עבד cannot be established. Nor are עבדי העיר the workmen employed in building the city, as Gesenius, Hvernick, and others suppose; for the city was not perpetually being built, so that there should be any necessity for setting apart a particular piece of land for the builders; but they are the working men of the city, the labouring class living in the city. They are not to be without possession in the future Jerusalem, but are to receive a possession in land for their maintenance. We are told in Ezek 48:19 who these workmen are. Here העבד is used collectively: as for the labouring class of the city, people out of all the tribes of Israel shall work upon the land belonging to the city. The suffix in יעבדוּהוּ points back to הנּותר. The transitive explanation, to employ a person in work, has nothing in the language to confirm it. The fact itself is in harmony with the statement in Ezek 45:6, that the city was to belong to all Israel. Lastly, in Ezek 48:20 the dimensions of the whole terumah, and the relation of the city possession to the holy terumah, are given. כּל־התּרוּמה is the whole heave, so far as it has hitherto been described, embracing the property of the priests, of the Levites, and of the city. In this extent it is twenty-five thousand rods long and the same broad. If, however, we add the property of the prince, which is not treated of till Ezek 48:21-23, it is considerably longer, and reaches, as has been stated in Ezek 48:8, to the boundaries of the land both on the east and west, the Jordan and the Mediterranean Sea, as the several tribe-territories do. But if we omit the prince's land, the space set apart fro the city possession occupied the fourth part of the holy terumah, i.e., of the portion of the priests and Levites. This is the meaning of the second half of Ezek 48:20, which literally reads thus: "to a fourth shall ye lift off the holy terumah for the city possession." This is not to be understood as meaning that a fourth was to be taken from the holy terumah for the city possession; for that would yield an incorrect proportion, as the twenty thousand rods in breadth would be reduced to fifteen thousand rods by the subtraction of the fourth part, which would be opposed to Ezek 48:9 and Ezek 48:15. The meaning is rather the following: from the whole terumah the fourth part of the area of the holy terumah is to be taken off for the city possession, i.e., five thousand rods for twenty thousand. According to Ezek 48:15, this was the size of the domain set apart for the city.
In Ezek 48:21-23 the situation and extent of the prince's possession are described. For Ezek 48:21, vid., Ezek 45:7. הנּותר, the rest of the terumah, as it has been defined in Ezek 48:8, reaching in length from the Jordan to the Mediterranean. As the holy terumah and the city possession were only twenty-five thousand rods in length, and did not reach to the Jordan on the east, or to the sea on the west, there still remained an area on either side whose length or extent toward the east and west is not given in rods, but may be calculated from the proportion which the intervening terumah bore to the length of the land (from east to west). אל־פּני and על־פּני, in front of, or along, the front of the twenty-five thousand rods, refer to the eastern and western boundaries of the terumah, which was twenty-five thousand rods in length. In Ezek 48:21 the statement is repeated, that the holy terumah and the sanctuary were to lie in the centre of it, i.e., between the portions of land appointed for the prince on either side; and lastly, in Ezek 48:22 it is still further stated, with regard to the prince's land on both sides of the terumah, that it was to lie between the adjoining tribe-territories of Judah (to the north) and Benjamin (to the south), so that it was to be bounded by these two. But this is expressed in a heavy and therefore obscure manner. The words בּתוך אשׁר לנשׂיא יהיה, "in the centre of that which belongs to the prince," belong to העיר... וּמאחזּת, and form together with the latter the subject, which is written absolutely; so that מן is not used in a partitive, but in a local sense (from), and the whole is to be rendered thus: And as for that which lies on the side of the possession of the Levites, and of the possession of the city in the centre of what belongs to the prince, (that which lies) between the territory of Judah and the territory of Benjamin shall belong to the prince. Hitzig's explanation - what remains between Judah and Benjamin, from the city territory to the priests' domain, both inclusive, shall belong to the prince - is arbitrary, and perverts the sense. The periphrastic designation of the terumah bounded off between the prince's land by the two portions named together without a copula, viz., "possession of the Levites and possession of the city," is worthy of notice. This periphrasis of the whole by two portions, shows that the portions named formed the boundaries of the whole, that the third portion, which is not mentioned, was enclosed within the two, so that the priests' portion with the sanctuary lay between them. - In Ezek 48:23-27 the rest of the tribes located to the south of the terumah are mentioned in order; and in Ezek 48:28 and Ezek 48:29 the account of the division of the land is brought to a close with a repetition of the statement as to the southern boundary (cf. Ezek 47:19), and a comprehensive concluding formula.
If now we attempt, in order to form a clear idea of the relation in which this prophetic division of the land stands to the actual size of Canaan according to the boundaries described in Ezek 47:15., to determine the length and breadth of the terumah given here by their geographical dimensions, twenty-five thousand rods, according to the metrological calculations of Boeckh and Bertheau, would be 1070 geographical miles, or, according to the estimate of the Hebrew cubit by Thenius, only 975 geographical miles.
(Note: According to Boeckh, one sacred cubit was equal to 234-1/3 Paris lines = 528.62 millimtres; according to Thenius = 214-1/2 P. l. = 481.62 millim. Now as one geographical mile, the 5400th part of the circumference of the globe, which is 40,000,000 metres, is equivalent to 7407.398 metres = 22, 803.290 old Paris feet, the geographical mile according to Boeckh is 14, 012-1/10 cubits = 2335-1/2 rods (sacred measure); according to Thenius, 15, 380-1/6 cubits = 2563-1/3 roads (s. m.), from which the numbers given in the text may easily be calculated.)
The extent of Canaan from Beersheba, or Kadesh, up to a line running across from Rs esh-Shukah to the spring El Lebweh, is 3 1/3 degrees, i.e., fifty geographical miles, ten of which are occupied by the terumah, and forty remain for the twelve tribe-territories, so that each tribe-lot would be 3 1/3 geographical miles in breadth. If, now, we reckon three geographical miles as the breadth of each of the five tribe-lots to the south of the terumah, and as the land becomes broader toward the south a breadth of 3-4/7 geographical miles for the seven tribe-lots to the north, the terumah set apart in the centre of the land would extend from the site of Jerusalem to Dothan or Jenin. If, however, we take into consideration the breadth of the land from east to west in the neighbourhood of Jerusalem, or where the Jordan enters the Dead Sea, Canaan is eleven geographical miles in breadth, whereas at Jenin it is hardly ten geographical miles broad. If, therefore, the length of the terumah (from east to west) was fully ten geographical miles, there would only remain a piece of land of half a mile in breadth on the east and west at the southern boundary, and nothing at all at the northern, for prince's land. We have therefore given to the terumah upon the map (Plate IV) the length and breadth of eight geographical miles, which leaves a tract of two miles on the average for the prince's land, so that it would occupy a fifth of the area of the holy terumah, whereas the city possession covered a fourth. No doubt the breadth of the terumah from south to north is also diminished thereby, so that it cannot have reached quite down to Jerusalem or quite up to Jenin. - If, now, we consider that the distances of places, and therefore also the measurements of a land in length and breadth, are greater in reality than those given upon the map, on account partly of the mountains and valleys and partly of the windings of the roads, and, still further, that our calculations of the Hebrew cubit are not quite certain, and that even the smaller estimates of Thenius are possibly still too high, the measurements of the terumah given by Ezekiel correspond as exactly to the actual size of the land of Canaan as could be expected with a knowledge of its extent obtained not by trigonometrical measurement, but from a simple calculation of the length of the roads. - But this furnishes a confirmation by no means slight of our assumption, that the lengths and breadths indicated here are measured by rods and not by cubits. Reckoned by cubits, the terumah would be only a mile and a half or a mile and two-thirds in length and breadth, and the city possession would be only a third of a mile broad; whereas the prince's land would be more than six times as large as the whole of the terumah, - i.e., of the territory of the Levites, the priests, and the city, - thirteen times as large as the priests' land, and from thirty to thirty-two times as large as the city possession = proportions the improbability of which is at once apparent.
Geneva 1599
48:1 Now these [are] the names of the (a) tribes. From the north end to the border of the way of Hethlon, as one goeth to Hamath, Hazarenan, the border of Damascus northward, to the border of Hamath; for these are his sides east [and] west; a [portion for] Dan.
(a) The tribes after they entered into the land under Joshua divided the land somewhat otherwise then is here set forth by this vision.
John Gill
48:1 Now these are the names of the tribes,.... That shall inherit the land; and an account is given of each of the portions of it they shall have for an inheritance; by which are meant, not the twelve tribes of Israel literally, among whom the land was never so divided as here, either in Joshua's time, or after the captivity of Babylon, but the Christian church, or the people of Christ under the Gospel dispensation, as in Rev_ 7:4, built upon the doctrine of the twelve apostles of Christ: the stranger sojourners are not here mentioned, who, according to the preceding chapter, were equally to inherit with the children of Israel, but are included; they being Israelites indeed, and fellowheirs, and all one in Christ, be they of whatsoever nation.
From the north end to the coast of the way of Hethlon, as one goeth to Hamath: the division of the land, and the distribution of the portions, begin at the north, and so go on to the south, by the way of Hethlon and Hamath; of which see Ezek 47:15 and along
by Hazarenan, the border of Damascus, northward to the coast of Hamath; see Ezek 47:17,
for these are his sides east and west; the sides of the tribe of Dan next mentioned, and so of every other tribe; which was measured from east to west, and consisted of 25,000 reeds foursquare, as appears from Ezek 48:8,
a portion for Dan; or, "Dan one" (t); either one tribe, or one portion. This tribe has its portion first assigned it, though it was provided for last in Joshua's time, and not sufficiently neither, Josh 19:40, and is left out in Revelation chapter seven, having fallen into idolatry; but here being provided for first, confirms what our Lord says, that the first shall be last, and the last first, Mt 19:30, and shows that the chief of sinners are received by Christ, and provided for by him, with grace here, and glory hereafter, who come to him, and believe in him; and that their inheritance is of grace, and not of works.
(t) "Dan una", Cocceius, Starckius; "Danis tribus una", Vatablus, Junius & Tremellius, Polanus; "pro Dane portio una", Munster, Tigurine version, Piscator.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:1 ALLOTMENT OF THE LAND TO SEVERAL TRIBES. (Eze. 48:1-35)
Dan--The lands are divided into portions of ideal exactness, running alongside of each other, the whole breadth from west to east, standing in a common relation to the temple in the center: seven tribes' portions on the north, five in the smaller division in the south. The portions of the city, the temple, the prince, and the priesthood, are in the middle, not within the boundaries of any tribe, all alike having a common interest in them. Judah has the place of honor next the center on the north, Benjamin the corresponding place of honor next the center on the south; because of the adherence of these two to the temple ordinances and to the house of David for so long, when the others deserted them. Dan, on the contrary, so long locally and morally semi-heathen (Jdg. 18:1-31), is to have the least honorable place, at the extreme north. For the same reason, St. John (Rev_ 7:5-8) omits Dan altogether.
48:248:2: Եւ ՚ի սահմանաց անտի Դանայ յարեւելակողմ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Ասերայ բաժին մի։
2 Դանի սահմաններից դէպի արեւելք, մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Ասերի ցեղին:
2 Դանի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Ասերին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանաց անտի Դանայ յարեւելակողմ մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Ասերայ բաժին մի:

48:2: Եւ ՚ի սահմանաց անտի Դանայ յարեւելակողմ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Ասերայ բաժին մի։
2 Դանի սահմաններից դէպի արեւելք, մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Ասերի ցեղին:
2 Դանի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Ասերին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:248:2 Подле границы Дана, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Асиру.
48:2 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τοῦ ο the Δαν δαν the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir μία εις.1 one; unit
48:2 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary דָּ֗ן dˈān דָּן Dan מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea אָשֵׁ֥ר ʔāšˌēr אָשֵׁר Asher אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:2. et ad terminum Dan a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Aser unaAnd by the border of Dan, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Aser:
2. And by the border of Dan, from the east side unto the west side; Asher, one .
48:2. And beyond the border of Dan, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Asher.
And by the border of Dan, from the east side unto the west side, a [portion for] Asher:

48:2 Подле границы Дана, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Асиру.
48:2
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τοῦ ο the
Δαν δαν the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:2
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
דָּ֗ן dˈān דָּן Dan
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
אָשֵׁ֥ר ʔāšˌēr אָשֵׁר Asher
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:2. et ad terminum Dan a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Aser una
And by the border of Dan, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Aser:
2. And by the border of Dan, from the east side unto the west side; Asher, one .
48:2. And beyond the border of Dan, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Asher.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
2. “Подле”, евр. ал, соб. “над”, LXX - “от”. - “От восточного края до западного”, - “края” (пеат), т. е. будущей св. земли, простиравшейся от Иордана на в. до Средиземного моря на з.; “западного” букв. “края моря”. Выражение не столь краткие как в 1: ст. о том же предмете и уже вполне ясное. Но LXX “к востоком даже до моря”, ta proV anatolaV, 'ewV proV twn proV qalassan. - “Это один удел Асиру”, букв. “Асир один”, LXX: “Асирово едино”, - как в 1: ст. о Дане. Почему здесь удел Асиру - см. предвар. замечания.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:2: Asher: Gen 30:12, Gen 30:13; Jos 19:24-31
John Gill
48:2 And by the border of Dan,.... Next to it, just by it, closely adjoining to it; for it should be observed, that these tribes, and their inheritances, are contiguous to each other; which denotes the union of true Christians, or believers in Christ, with each other; they are members one of another, one body, one bread, and all one in Christ; and their harmony, unity, and concord, their comfortable communion and fellowship with each other; especially as it will be in the latter day, when they shall no more grieve and vex each other, nor separate from one another; but the two sticks shall be one in the hand of the Lord, Is 11:13,
from the east side unto the west side; being just in the same position as the former tribe, and of the same measure and extent:
a portion for Asher; an inheritance for the tribe of Asher, the "blessed" of the Lord with all blessings, spiritual and eternal: and it should be known, once for all, that the portions of the several tribes are exactly alike: true believers have the same covenant God and Father for their portion; the same Lord, Redeemer, and Saviour, Head and Husband, Jesus Christ; they are members of the same body; partake of the same Spirit, and his graces; obtain like precious faith; are called in one hope of their calling; have a right to the same privileges and ordinances, and will share in the same heavenly inheritance, Eph 4:4.
48:348:3: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Ասերայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Նեփթաղիմայ բաժին մի։
3 Ասերի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Նեփթաղիմի ցեղին:
3 Ասերի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Նեփթաղիմին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Ասերայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` Նեփթաղիմայ բաժին մի:

48:3: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Ասերայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Նեփթաղիմայ բաժին մի։
3 Ասերի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Նեփթաղիմի ցեղին:
3 Ասերի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Նեփթաղիմին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:348:3 Подле границы Асира, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Неффалиму.
48:3 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Νεφθαλιμ νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim μία εις.1 one; unit
48:3 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary אָשֵׁ֗ר ʔāšˈēr אָשֵׁר Asher מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east וְ wᵊ וְ and עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea נַפְתָּלִ֥י naftālˌî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:3. et super terminum Aser a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Nepthalim unaAnd by the border of Aser, from the east side even to the side of the sea one portion for Nephthali.
3. And by the border of Asher, from the east side even unto the west side; Naphtali, one .
48:3. And beyond the border of Asher, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Naphtali.
And by the border of Asher, from the east side even unto the west side, a [portion for] Naphtali:

48:3 Подле границы Асира, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Неффалиму.
48:3
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Νεφθαλιμ νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:3
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
אָשֵׁ֗ר ʔāšˈēr אָשֵׁר Asher
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
נַפְתָּלִ֥י naftālˌî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:3. et super terminum Aser a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Nepthalim una
And by the border of Aser, from the east side even to the side of the sea one portion for Nephthali.
3. And by the border of Asher, from the east side even unto the west side; Naphtali, one .
48:3. And beyond the border of Asher, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Naphtali.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
3-7. Об основаниях для такого местожительства каждого колена - см. предв. замеч. Выражения в евр. букв. тожественные с 2: ст., только иногда “восточного” - кадима (ст. 3-5) в винительном падеже направления, а иногда кадии (ст. 6, 7), как в 1, 2, 8: ст. в им. п. А “западного” (букв. море) везде в вин. напр. йама (2-8: ст., только в 1: ст. им. п. - айм). LXX же едва не в каждом стихе разнообразят выражения, а слав. еще более: ст. 3, 6, 7: - apo twn proV anatolaV 'ewV twn proV qalassan - слав. “от сущих к востоком даже до моря”; в ст. 6: “иже на восток”, 7: “иже на востоки”; ст. 4: “от страны восточныя даже до страны моря”: ст. 5: “от… сущих на востоки даже до сущих к морю”.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:3: Naphtali: Gen 30:7, Gen 30:8; Jos 19:32-39
John Gill
48:3 And by the border of Asher, from the east side even unto the west side, a portion for Naphtali. Close to the tribe of Asher and his inheritance, in the same direction from east to west, lay the part assigned to the tribe of Naphtali: such Christians who are wrestlers with God in prayer, and against their spiritual enemies, and strive and contend for the doctrines of the Gospel, may be designed.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:3 Asher--a tribe of which no one of note is mentioned in the Old Testament. In the New Testament one is singled out of it, the prophetess Anna.
48:448:4: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Նեփթաղիմայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Մանասէի բաժին մի[13094]։ [13094] Բազումք. Նեփթաղիմի յարեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն Մա՛՛։
4 Նեփթաղիմի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Մանասէի ցեղին:
4 Նեփթաղիմի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Մանասէին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Նեփթաղիմայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` Մանասէի բաժին մի:

48:4: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Նեփթաղիմայ յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Մանասէի բաժին մի[13094]։
[13094] Բազումք. Նեփթաղիմի յարեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն Մա՛՛։
4 Նեփթաղիմի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Մանասէի ցեղին:
4 Նեփթաղիմի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Մանասէին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:448:4 Подле границы Неффалима, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Манассии.
48:4 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Νεφθαλι νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Μανασση μανασσης Manassēs; Manassis μία εις.1 one; unit
48:4 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary נַפְתָּלִ֗י naftālˈî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea מְנַשֶּׁ֥ה mᵊnaššˌeh מְנַשֶּׁה Manasseh אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:4. et super terminum Nepthalim a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Manasse unaAnd by the border of Nephthali, from the east side even to the side of the one portion for Manasses.
4. And by the border of Naphtali, from the east side unto the west side; Manasseh, one .
48:4. And beyond the border of Naphtali, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Manasseh.
And by the border of Naphtali, from the east side unto the west side, a [portion for] Manasseh:

48:4 Подле границы Неффалима, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Манассии.
48:4
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Νεφθαλι νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Μανασση μανασσης Manassēs; Manassis
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:4
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
נַפְתָּלִ֗י naftālˈî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
מְנַשֶּׁ֥ה mᵊnaššˌeh מְנַשֶּׁה Manasseh
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:4. et super terminum Nepthalim a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Manasse una
And by the border of Nephthali, from the east side even to the side of the one portion for Manasses.
4. And by the border of Naphtali, from the east side unto the west side; Manasseh, one .
48:4. And beyond the border of Naphtali, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Manasseh.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:4: by the border: In this division of the Holy Land, a portion is laid out for each of the twelve tribes directly across the country, from east to west; and deducting the square of 25, 000 reeds, or nearly fifty miles on each side, between Judah and Benjamin, for the priests, Levites, city, and temple, with the inheritance of the prince to the east and west (See note on Eze 45:1), from 280 miles, the length of the country from north to south, there will remain for each tribe a portion of less than twenty miles in width, and 150 in length. This division of the land entirely differs from that which was made in the days of Joshua, in which the tribes were not only differently placed, but confused and inter-mixed; while here distinct lots are assigned to each of the twelve tribes, in a regular mathematical form. Literally such a division never took place. it seems to denote the equality of privileges which subsists among all the tribes of Believers, of whatever nation, and whatever their pRev_ious character may have been.
Manasseh: Gen 30:22-24, Gen 41:51, Gen 48:5, Gen 48:14-20; Jos 13:29-31, Jos 17:1-11
John Gill
48:4 And by the border of Naphtali, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Manasseh. Just in like manner, next to Naphtali lay the tribe of Manasseh, and the portion of land appointed for that tribe; even such Christians who "forget" the things that are behind, and reach to those that are before; forget their former companions, their own people, and father's house, their carnal lusts and pleasures, and their own works of righteousness, and follow after Christ and his righteousness.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:4 Manasseh--The intercourse and unity between the two and a half tribes east of the Jordan, and the nine and a half west of it, had been much kept up by the splitting of Manasseh, causing the visits of kinsmen one to the other from both sides of the Jordan. There shall be no need for this in the new order of things.
48:548:5: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Մանասէի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Եփրեմի բաժին մի[13095]։ [13095] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն։
5 Մանասէի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Եփրեմի ցեղին:
5 Մանասէի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Եփրեմին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Մանասէի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` Եփրեմի բաժին մի:

48:5: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Մանասէի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Եփրեմի բաժին մի[13095]։
[13095] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն։
5 Մանասէի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Եփրեմի ցեղին:
5 Մանասէի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Եփրեմին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:548:5 Подле границы Манассии, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Ефрему.
48:5 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Μανασση μανασσης Manassēs; Manassis ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Εφραιμ εφραιμ Ephraim; Efrem μία εις.1 one; unit
48:5 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary מְנַשֶּׁ֗ה mᵊnaššˈeh מְנַשֶּׁה Manasseh מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea אֶפְרַ֥יִם ʔefrˌayim אֶפְרַיִם Ephraim אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:5. et super terminum Manasse a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Ephraim unaAnd by the border of Manasses, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Ephraim.
5. And by the border of Manasseh, from the east side unto the west side; Ephraim, one .
48:5. And beyond the border of Manasseh, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Ephraim.
And by the border of Manasseh, from the east side unto the west side, a [portion for] Ephraim:

48:5 Подле границы Манассии, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Ефрему.
48:5
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Μανασση μανασσης Manassēs; Manassis
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Εφραιμ εφραιμ Ephraim; Efrem
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:5
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
מְנַשֶּׁ֗ה mᵊnaššˈeh מְנַשֶּׁה Manasseh
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
אֶפְרַ֥יִם ʔefrˌayim אֶפְרַיִם Ephraim
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:5. et super terminum Manasse a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Ephraim una
And by the border of Manasses, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Ephraim.
5. And by the border of Manasseh, from the east side unto the west side; Ephraim, one .
48:5. And beyond the border of Manasseh, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Ephraim.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:5: Ephraim: Jos 16:1-10, Jos 17:8-10, Jos 17:14-18
John Gill
48:5 And by the border of Manasseh, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Ephraim. Close to the tribe of Manasseh, and the inheritance of it, which is no more reckoned a half, but a whole tribe, and has an inheritance equal to the rest, lay the tribe of Ephraim, and the inheritance assigned to that; even to such believers as are fruitful in grace and good works. Joseph is not mentioned, as in Ezek 47:13, the two portions there given him being here allotted to his two sons, Manasseh and Ephraim.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:5 Ephraim--This tribe, within its two dependent tribes, Manasseh and Benjamin, for upwards of four hundred years under the judges held the pre-eminence.
48:648:6: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Եփրեմի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Ռոբինի բաժին մի։
6 Եփրեմի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Ռուբէնի ցեղին:
6 Եփրեմի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Ռուբէնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Եփրեմի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Ռուբենի բաժին մի:

48:6: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Եփրեմի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ՝ Ռոբինի բաժին մի։
6 Եփրեմի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Ռուբէնի ցեղին:
6 Եփրեմի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Ռուբէնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:648:6 Подле границы Ефрема, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Рувиму.
48:6 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Εφραιμ εφραιμ Ephraim; Efrem ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben μία εις.1 one; unit
48:6 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary אֶפְרַ֗יִם ʔefrˈayim אֶפְרַיִם Ephraim מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east וְ wᵊ וְ and עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea רְאוּבֵ֥ן rᵊʔûvˌēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:6. et super terminum Ephraim a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Ruben unaAnd by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Ruben.
6. And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even unto the west side; Reuben, one .
48:6. And beyond the border of Ephraim, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Reuben.
And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even unto the west side, a [portion for] Reuben:

48:6 Подле границы Ефрема, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Рувиму.
48:6
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Εφραιμ εφραιμ Ephraim; Efrem
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:6
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
אֶפְרַ֗יִם ʔefrˈayim אֶפְרַיִם Ephraim
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
רְאוּבֵ֥ן rᵊʔûvˌēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:6. et super terminum Ephraim a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Ruben una
And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Ruben.
6. And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side even unto the west side; Reuben, one .
48:6. And beyond the border of Ephraim, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Reuben.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:6: Reuben: Gen 29:32, Gen 49:3, Gen 49:4; Jos 13:15-21
John Gill
48:6 And by the border of Ephraim, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Reuben. Who, through his sin, lost his birthright; but now, his sin being forgiven and forgotten, has a portion assigned him upon the border of Ephraim, and next to the tribe of Judah; when in Moses and Joshua's time it lay on the other side Jordan: this points to such persons that shall have their lot and portion in spiritual things; that "see the Son", that look to Christ alone for righteousness, peace, pardon, and eternal life.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:6 Reuben--doomed formerly for incest and instability "not to excel" (Gen 49:4). So no distinguished prophet, priest, or king had come from it. Of it were the notorious Dathan and Abiram, the mutineers. A pastoral and Bedouin character marked it and Gad (Judg 5:16).
48:748:7: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Ռոբինի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Յուդայի բաժին մի[13096]։ [13096] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն։
7 Ռուբէնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Յուդայի ցեղին:
7 Ռուբէնին սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Յուդային մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Ռուբենի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` Յուդայի բաժին մի:

48:7: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Ռոբինի յարեւելից կուսէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ՝ Յուդայի բաժին մի[13096]։
[13096] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմն։
7 Ռուբէնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Յուդայի ցեղին:
7 Ռուբէնին սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Յուդային մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:748:7 Подле границы Рувима, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Иуде.
48:7 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha μία εις.1 one; unit
48:7 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary רְאוּבֵ֗ן rᵊʔûvˈēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea יְהוּדָ֥ה yᵊhûḏˌā יְהוּדָה Judah אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:7. et super terminum Ruben a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Iuda unaAnd by the border of Ruben, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Juda.
7. And by the border of Reuben, from the east side unto the west side; Judah, .
48:7. And beyond the border of Reuben, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Judah.
And by the border of Reuben, from the east side unto the west side, a [portion for] Judah:

48:7 Подле границы Рувима, от восточного края до западного, это один удел Иуде.
48:7
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:7
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
רְאוּבֵ֗ן rᵊʔûvˈēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
יְהוּדָ֥ה yᵊhûḏˌā יְהוּדָה Judah
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:7. et super terminum Ruben a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Iuda una
And by the border of Ruben, from the east side even to the side of the sea, one portion for Juda.
7. And by the border of Reuben, from the east side unto the west side; Judah, .
48:7. And beyond the border of Reuben, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Judah.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:7: Judah: Gen 29:35; jos 15:1-63, Jos 19:9
John Gill
48:7 And by the border of Reuben, from the east side unto the west side, a portion for Judah. Such who "confess" the Lord before men, and "praise" his name for all blessings, temporal and spiritual, they receive from him: these seven tribes already mentioned, as they lay contiguous to each other, and had portions and inheritances alike assigned to them; so they were all of them to the north of the sanctuary and city after mentioned.
48:848:8: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Յուդայի յարեւելից կողմանէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ. եւ եղիցի պտուղ նուիրաց քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն, եւ տասն հազար ՚ի լայնութիւն. իբրեւ զմի ՚ի վիճակաց ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։ Եւ եղիցի սուրբ ՚ի մէջ նոցա.
8 Յուդայի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ քսանհինգ ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ եւ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, թող լինի ձեր սրբավայրի հողամասը՝ իբրեւ բաժիններից մէկը, որտեղ կը լինի սրբարանը,
8 «Յուդայի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը պիտի ըլլայ այն ընծան, որ պիտի նուիրէք ու անիկա քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ լայնութիւն եւ միւս բաժիններէն մէկուն չափ երկայնութիւն պիտի ունենայ, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը եւ սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Յուդայի յարեւելից կողմանէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` եղիցի [1027]պտուղ նուիրաց քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն եւ տասն հազար ի լայնութիւն`` իբրեւ զմի ի վիճակաց ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմն. եւ եղիցի [1028]սուրբ ի մէջ նոցա:

48:8: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Յուդայի յարեւելից կողմանէ մինչեւ ցծովակողմ. եւ եղիցի պտուղ նուիրաց քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն, եւ տասն հազար ՚ի լայնութիւն. իբրեւ զմի ՚ի վիճակաց ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։ Եւ եղիցի սուրբ ՚ի մէջ նոցա.
8 Յուդայի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ քսանհինգ ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ եւ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, թող լինի ձեր սրբավայրի հողամասը՝ իբրեւ բաժիններից մէկը, որտեղ կը լինի սրբարանը,
8 «Յուդայի սահմանին քով, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը պիտի ըլլայ այն ընծան, որ պիտի նուիրէք ու անիկա քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ լայնութիւն եւ միւս բաժիններէն մէկուն չափ երկայնութիւն պիտի ունենայ, արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը եւ սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:848:8 А подле границы Иуды, от восточного края до западного, священный участок, шириною в двадцать пять тысяч {тростей}, а длиною наравне с другими уделами, от восточного края до западного; среди него будет святилище.
48:8 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea ἔσται ειμι be ἡ ο the ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit τοῦ ο the ἀφορισμοῦ αφορισμος five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand εὖρος ευρος and; even μῆκος μηκος length καθὼς καθως just as / like μία εις.1 one; unit τῶν ο the μερίδων μερις portion ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east καὶ και and; even ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be τὸ ο the ἅγιον αγιος holy ἐν εν in μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
48:8 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַל֙ ʕˌal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary יְהוּדָ֔ה yᵊhûḏˈā יְהוּדָה Judah מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֖ים qāḏˌîm קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֑מָּה yˈommā יָם sea תִּהְיֶ֣ה tihyˈeh היה be הַ ha הַ the תְּרוּמָ֣ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution אֲֽשֶׁר־ ʔˈᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] תָּרִ֡ימוּ tārˈîmû רום be high חֲמִשָּׁה֩ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֜לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand רֹ֗חַב rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth וְ wᵊ וְ and אֹ֜רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length כְּ kᵊ כְּ as אַחַ֤ד ʔaḥˈaḏ אֶחָד one הַ ha הַ the חֲלָקִים֙ ḥᵃlāqîm חֵלֶק share מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֤ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be הַ ha הַ the מִּקְדָּ֖שׁ mmiqdˌāš מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary בְּ bᵊ בְּ in תֹוכֹֽו׃ ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:8. et super terminum Iuda a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris erunt primitiae quas separabitis viginti quinque milibus latitudinis et longitudinis sicuti singulae partes a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris et erit sanctuarium in medio eiusAnd by the border of Juda, from the east side even to the side of the sea, shall be the firstfruits which you shall set apart, five and twenty thousand in breadth, and length, as every one of the portions from the east side to the side of the sea: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst thereof.
8. And by the border of Judah, from the east side unto the west side, shall be the oblation which ye shall offer, five and twenty thousand in breadth, and in length as one of the portions, from the east side unto the west side: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it.
48:8. And beyond the border of Judah, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be the first-fruits, which you shall separate, twenty-five thousand in width, and in length, the same as each one of the portions from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea. And the sanctuary shall be in its midst.
And by the border of Judah, from the east side unto the west side, shall be the offering which ye shall offer of five and twenty thousand [reeds in] breadth, and [in] length as one of the [other] parts, from the east side unto the west side: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it:

48:8 А подле границы Иуды, от восточного края до западного, священный участок, шириною в двадцать пять тысяч {тростей}, а длиною наравне с другими уделами, от восточного края до западного; среди него будет святилище.
48:8
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
ἔσται ειμι be
ἡ ο the
ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit
τοῦ ο the
ἀφορισμοῦ αφορισμος five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
εὖρος ευρος and; even
μῆκος μηκος length
καθὼς καθως just as / like
μία εις.1 one; unit
τῶν ο the
μερίδων μερις portion
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
καὶ και and; even
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
τὸ ο the
ἅγιον αγιος holy
ἐν εν in
μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
48:8
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַל֙ ʕˌal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
יְהוּדָ֔ה yᵊhûḏˈā יְהוּדָה Judah
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֖ים qāḏˌîm קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֑מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
תִּהְיֶ֣ה tihyˈeh היה be
הַ ha הַ the
תְּרוּמָ֣ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution
אֲֽשֶׁר־ ʔˈᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative]
תָּרִ֡ימוּ tārˈîmû רום be high
חֲמִשָּׁה֩ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֜לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
רֹ֗חַב rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֹ֜רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
כְּ kᵊ כְּ as
אַחַ֤ד ʔaḥˈaḏ אֶחָד one
הַ ha הַ the
חֲלָקִים֙ ḥᵃlāqîm חֵלֶק share
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֤ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be
הַ ha הַ the
מִּקְדָּ֖שׁ mmiqdˌāš מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
תֹוכֹֽו׃ ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:8. et super terminum Iuda a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris erunt primitiae quas separabitis viginti quinque milibus latitudinis et longitudinis sicuti singulae partes a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris et erit sanctuarium in medio eius
And by the border of Juda, from the east side even to the side of the sea, shall be the firstfruits which you shall set apart, five and twenty thousand in breadth, and length, as every one of the portions from the east side to the side of the sea: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst thereof.
8. And by the border of Judah, from the east side unto the west side, shall be the oblation which ye shall offer, five and twenty thousand in breadth, and in length as one of the portions, from the east side unto the west side: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it.
48:8. And beyond the border of Judah, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be the first-fruits, which you shall separate, twenty-five thousand in width, and in length, the same as each one of the portions from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea. And the sanctuary shall be in its midst.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
8-22. определяется величина “священного участка”, евр. терума, LXX: ??????, начаток. Вульг. primitiae (см. объяснение XLV:1) в который входят 1) участок священников с храмом, (ст. 9-12), 2) участок левитов (13-17), 3) города (15-20) и 4) князи (21-22). Расчет этого участка, являющегося, в сущности, уделом Левиина колена, указывается точнее, чем участки колен: кроме длины, равной, как и уделы колен, всему протяжению святой земли, указывается и ширина его: 25: 000: не указываемой меры: см. объяснение XLV:1. Важен этот участок тем, что среди его находится “святилище”, гамикдаш (LXX ?? '?????, святое), т. е. храм, который лежит т.о. совершенно вне города. Не указана единица меры, см. объяснение XLV:2. - “Шириною”, т. е. с севера на юг. - “Длиною” - с востока на запад.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:8: "Length" is throughout measured from west to east, as breadth is from north to south.
The offering Eze 48:9-22, or, "oblation," here includes all the land given to priests, Levites, city, and prince; the different parts being distinguished. All these together are to extend from west to east in the same way as the portions of the other tribes, the imaginary Jordan being the eastern boundary of all.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:8: the offering: Eze 45:1-6
the sanctuary: Eze 48:35; Isa 12:6, Isa 33:20-22; Zac 2:11, Zac 2:12; Co2 6:16; Eph 2:20-22; Col 2:9; Rev 21:3, Rev 21:22, Rev 22:3
Geneva 1599
48:8 And by the border of Judah, from the east side to the west side, (b) shall be the offering which ye shall offer of five and twenty thousand [reeds in] breadth, and [in] length as one of the [other] parts, from the east side to the west side: and the sanctuary shall be in the midst of it.
(b) That is, the portion of the ground which they will separate and appoint to the Lord which will be divided into three parts for the priests for the prince and for the city.
John Gill
48:8 And by the border of Judah, from the east side unto the west side, shall be the offering,.... Or the oblation of a holy portion of the land unto the Lord before made mention of, Ezek 45:1 this was close by the tribe of Judah, and in the same direction with that and the rest of the tribes, proceeding in length from east to west: this takes in the whole allotted to the sanctuary, the priests, the Levites, the city, and the prince; each of which are taken notice of in the following verses:
which they shall offer of five and twenty thousand reeds in breadth; from north to south; which makes, as the Jews (u) say, seventy five miles; some make it seventy seven, and others more:
and in length as one of the other parts, from the east side unto the west side; that is, equal to one of the portions allotted to anyone of the tribes, which were alike: what this measure was is not said, but was the same with the breadth; since the whole oblation was five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand, Ezek 48:20,
and the sanctuary shall be in the midst thereof; of the holy portion of land; see Ezek 45:3, not in the tribe of Judah or Benjamin; nor in the city of Jerusalem, as before; but many miles from thence.
(u) Jarchi & Kimchi in loc. e Siphri; so Lipman. Tzurath Beth Hamikdash, fol. 1. 1.
48:948:9: պտուղ զոր նուիրիցեն Տեառն, յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար կանգուն, եւ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար[13097]։ [13097] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. Քսան եւ հինգ հազար կանգուն։
9 մի ընծայ՝ նուիրուած Տիրոջը, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ ու տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ:
9 Տէրոջը նուիրելու ընծանիդ քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ երկայն ու տասը հազար եղէգ լայն պէտք է ըլլայ։
Պտուղ զոր նուիրիցեն`` Տեառն, յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար եւ ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար:

48:9: պտուղ զոր նուիրիցեն Տեառն, յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար կանգուն, եւ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար[13097]։
[13097] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. Քսան եւ հինգ հազար կանգուն։
9 մի ընծայ՝ նուիրուած Տիրոջը, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ ու տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ:
9 Տէրոջը նուիրելու ընծանիդ քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ երկայն ու տասը հազար եղէգ լայն պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:948:9 Участок, который вы посвятите Господу, длиною будет в двадцать пять тысяч, а шириною в десять тысяч {тростей}.
48:9 ἀπαρχή απαρχη firstfruit ἣν ος who; what ἀφοριοῦσι αφοριζω separate τῷ ο the κυρίῳ κυριος lord; master μῆκος μηκος length πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even εὖρος ευρος twenty καὶ και and; even πέντε πεντε five χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
48:9 הַ ha הַ the תְּרוּמָ֕ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] תָּרִ֖ימוּ tārˌîmû רום be high לַֽ lˈa לְ to יהוָ֑ה [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֹ֗רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:9. primitiae quas separastis Domino longitudo viginti quinque milibus et latitudo decem milibusThe firstfruits which you shall set apart for the Lord will be the length of five and twenty thousand, and the breadth of ten thousand.
9. The oblation that ye shall offer unto the LORD shall be five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth.
48:9. The first-fruits, which you shall separate to the Lord, shall be, in length, twenty-five thousand, and in width, ten thousand.
The oblation that ye shall offer unto the LORD [shall be] of five and twenty thousand in length, and of ten thousand in breadth:

48:9 Участок, который вы посвятите Господу, длиною будет в двадцать пять тысяч, а шириною в десять тысяч {тростей}.
48:9
ἀπαρχή απαρχη firstfruit
ἣν ος who; what
ἀφοριοῦσι αφοριζω separate
τῷ ο the
κυρίῳ κυριος lord; master
μῆκος μηκος length
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
εὖρος ευρος twenty
καὶ και and; even
πέντε πεντε five
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
48:9
הַ ha הַ the
תְּרוּמָ֕ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
תָּרִ֖ימוּ tārˌîmû רום be high
לַֽ lˈa לְ to
יהוָ֑ה [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH
אֹ֗רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:9. primitiae quas separastis Domino longitudo viginti quinque milibus et latitudo decem milibus
The firstfruits which you shall set apart for the Lord will be the length of five and twenty thousand, and the breadth of ten thousand.
9. The oblation that ye shall offer unto the LORD shall be five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth.
48:9. The first-fruits, which you shall separate to the Lord, shall be, in length, twenty-five thousand, and in width, ten thousand.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
9. Священнейшею частью этого участка, посвященной самому Господу, является центр его, непосредственно примыкающей к храму, в 25: 000: х 10: 000, по LXX 25: 000: кв., что новейшие предпочитают; ср. XLV:1, 3: см. объяснение там и сл. ст.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:9: The oblation - This was a portion of land twenty-five thousand cubits in length, by ten thousand broad; in the center of which was the temple, which must be destined for the use of the priests, the Levites, and the prince.
John Gill
48:9 The oblation that ye shall offer to the Lord,.... That which belonged to the sanctuary, and to the priests, which was taken and separated for that use; which here, and in the following verses, is particularly and separately considered:
shall be of five and twenty thousand in length; that is, five and twenty thousand reeds from east to west:
and of ten thousand in breadth; from north to south; see Ezek 45:3.
48:1048:10: Եղիցի պտուղ սրբութեանց քահանայիցն. ընդ հարաւակողմ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար, եւ ընդ ծովակողմ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար, եւ ընդ արեւելս ՚ի լայնութիւն տա՛սն հազար, եւ ընդ հիւսւսակողմ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար։ Եւ եղիցի սահման սրբութեանցն ՚ի միջի նոցա[13098], [13098] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. Ընդ հարաւակողմն յերկայնութիւն։ Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ ընդ արեւելս... եւ ընդ հիւսւսակողմ յերկայ՛՛։
10 Քահանաների սրբատեղիներին նուիրուած հողամասը կը լինի հարաւային կողմում քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ, արեւմուտքում՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, արեւելքում՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, իսկ հիւսիսում՝ քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին: Դրանց մէջտեղում կը լինի սրբարանը:
10 Եւ սուրբ ընծան ասոնց ըլլայ, այսինքն քահանաներուն։ Հիւսիսէն՝ երկայնքը քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ, արեւմուտքէն՝ լայնքը տասը հազար եղէգ, արեւելքէն՝ լայնքը տասը հազար եղէգ, հարաւէն՝ երկայնքը քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ ու Տէրոջը սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պէտք է ըլլայ։
[1029]Եղիցի պտուղ`` սրբութեանց քահանայիցն, ընդ [1030]հարաւակողմն` յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար, եւ ընդ ծովակողմն` ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար, եւ ընդ արեւելս` ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար, եւ ընդ [1031]հիւսիսակողմն` յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար. եւ եղիցի [1032]սահման սրբութեանցն ի միջի նոցա:

48:10: Եղիցի պտուղ սրբութեանց քահանայիցն. ընդ հարաւակողմ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար, եւ ընդ ծովակողմ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար, եւ ընդ արեւելս ՚ի լայնութիւն տա՛սն հազար, եւ ընդ հիւսւսակողմ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար։ Եւ եղիցի սահման սրբութեանցն ՚ի միջի նոցա[13098],
[13098] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. Ընդ հարաւակողմն յերկայնութիւն։ Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ ընդ արեւելս... եւ ընդ հիւսւսակողմ յերկայ՛՛։
10 Քահանաների սրբատեղիներին նուիրուած հողամասը կը լինի հարաւային կողմում քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ, արեւմուտքում՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, արեւելքում՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ, իսկ հիւսիսում՝ քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին: Դրանց մէջտեղում կը լինի սրբարանը:
10 Եւ սուրբ ընծան ասոնց ըլլայ, այսինքն քահանաներուն։ Հիւսիսէն՝ երկայնքը քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ, արեւմուտքէն՝ լայնքը տասը հազար եղէգ, արեւելքէն՝ լայնքը տասը հազար եղէգ, հարաւէն՝ երկայնքը քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ ու Տէրոջը սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1048:10 И этот священный участок должен принадлежать священникам, к северу двадцать пять тысяч и к морю в ширину десять тысяч, и к востоку в ширину десять тысяч, а к югу в длину двадцать пять тысяч {тростей}, и среди него будет святилище Господне.
48:10 τούτων ουτος this; he ἔσται ειμι be ἡ ο the ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy τοῖς ο the ἱερεῦσιν ιερευς priest πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea πλάτος πλατος breadth δέκα δεκα ten χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east πλάτος πλατος breadth δέκα δεκα ten χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind μῆκος μηκος length εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty καὶ και and; even πέντε πεντε five χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the ὄρος ορος mountain; mount τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy ἔσται ειμι be ἐν εν in μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
48:10 וּ֠ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to אֵ֜לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these תִּהְיֶ֣ה tihyˈeh היה be תְרֽוּמַת־ ṯᵊrˈûmaṯ- תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּדֶשׁ֮ qqōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness לַ la לְ to † הַ the כֹּֽהֲנִים֒ kkˈōhᵃnîm כֹּהֵן priest צָפֹ֜ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֗לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and יָ֨מָּה֙ yˈommā יָם sea רֹ֚חַב ˈrōḥav רֹחַב breadth עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and קָדִ֗ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east רֹ֚חַב ˈrōḥav רֹחַב breadth עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and נֶ֕גְבָּה nˈeḡbā נֶגֶב south אֹ֕רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be מִקְדַּשׁ־ miqdaš- מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH בְּ bᵊ בְּ in תֹוכֹֽו׃ ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:10. hae autem erunt primitiae sanctuarii sacerdotum ad aquilonem viginti quinque milia et ad mare latitudinis decem milia sed et ad orientem latitudinis decem milia et ad meridiem longitudinis viginti quinque milia et erit sanctuarium Domini in medio eiusAnd these shall be the firstfruits of the sanctuary for the priests: toward the north five and twenty thousand in length, and toward the sea ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east also ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the Lord shall be in the midst thereof.
10. And for these, even for the priests, shall be the holy oblation; toward the north five and twenty thousand , and toward the west ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the LORD shall be in the midst thereof.
48:10. And these shall be the first-fruits for the sanctuary of the priests: toward the north, in length, twenty-five thousand, and toward the sea, in width, ten thousand, but also, toward the east, in width, ten thousand, and toward the south, in length, twenty-five thousand. And the sanctuary of the Lord shall be in its midst.
And for them, [even] for the priests, shall be [this] holy oblation; toward the north five and twenty thousand [in length], and toward the west ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the LORD shall be in the midst thereof:

48:10 И этот священный участок должен принадлежать священникам, к северу двадцать пять тысяч и к морю в ширину десять тысяч, и к востоку в ширину десять тысяч, а к югу в длину двадцать пять тысяч {тростей}, и среди него будет святилище Господне.
48:10
τούτων ουτος this; he
ἔσται ειμι be
ἡ ο the
ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
τοῖς ο the
ἱερεῦσιν ιερευς priest
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
πλάτος πλατος breadth
δέκα δεκα ten
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
πλάτος πλατος breadth
δέκα δεκα ten
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
μῆκος μηκος length
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
καὶ και and; even
πέντε πεντε five
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
ὄρος ορος mountain; mount
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
ἔσται ειμι be
ἐν εν in
μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
48:10
וּ֠ û וְ and
לְ lᵊ לְ to
אֵ֜לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these
תִּהְיֶ֣ה tihyˈeh היה be
תְרֽוּמַת־ ṯᵊrˈûmaṯ- תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּדֶשׁ֮ qqōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
כֹּֽהֲנִים֒ kkˈōhᵃnîm כֹּהֵן priest
צָפֹ֜ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north
חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֗לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָ֨מָּה֙ yˈommā יָם sea
רֹ֚חַב ˈrōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
קָדִ֗ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
רֹ֚חַב ˈrōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נֶ֕גְבָּה nˈeḡbā נֶגֶב south
אֹ֕רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be
מִקְדַּשׁ־ miqdaš- מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary
יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
תֹוכֹֽו׃ ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:10. hae autem erunt primitiae sanctuarii sacerdotum ad aquilonem viginti quinque milia et ad mare latitudinis decem milia sed et ad orientem latitudinis decem milia et ad meridiem longitudinis viginti quinque milia et erit sanctuarium Domini in medio eius
And these shall be the firstfruits of the sanctuary for the priests: toward the north five and twenty thousand in length, and toward the sea ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east also ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the Lord shall be in the midst thereof.
10. And for these, even for the priests, shall be the holy oblation; toward the north five and twenty thousand , and toward the west ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length: and the sanctuary of the LORD shall be in the midst thereof.
48:10. And these shall be the first-fruits for the sanctuary of the priests: toward the north, in length, twenty-five thousand, and toward the sea, in width, ten thousand, but also, toward the east, in width, ten thousand, and toward the south, in length, twenty-five thousand. And the sanctuary of the Lord shall be in its midst.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
10. “И этот священный участок должен принадлежать священникам”. LXX точнее: “от сих будет начаток святых (терумат гаккодеш) жерцм”, т. е. из всей терумы особенно священной будет часть ее принадлежащая священникам. В виду такой святости и важности этой части она измеряется с собою раздельностью по всем сторонам своим, давая кв. 25: 000: х 10: 000. Чтобы этот стих не был повторением 9: ст., цифры там нужно читать по LXX.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:10: Toward the north ... toward the east ... - i. e., the measurements are "along the north and east sides," etc.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:10: for the priests: Eze 44:28, Eze 45:4; Num 35:1-9; jos 21:1-45; Mat 10:10; Co1 9:13, Co1 9:14
and the sanctuary: Eze 48:8
John Gill
48:10 And for them, even the priests, shall be this holy oblation,.... This holy portion of land, excepting that which is for the sanctuary, is to be for the use of the priests to build houses on to dwell in; signifying, that the ministers of the Gospel are to be taken care of, and sufficient provision made for their maintenance; see Ezek 45:4,
toward the north five and twenty thousand in length, and toward the west ten thousand in breadth, and toward the east ten thousand in breadth, and toward the south five and twenty thousand in length; to the north and south five and twenty thousand reeds each; and to the east and west ten thousand each; all this belongs to the priests, excepting the place for the sanctuary, that stood in the middle of it, as repeated in the following clause: and the sanctuary of the Lord shall be in the midst thereof; as in Ezek 48:8.
48:1148:11: քահանայիցն սրբեցելոց որդւոցն Սադովկայ, որք պահեն զպահպանութիւնս տանն Տեառն. որք ո՛չ մոլորեցան ՚ի մոլորութիւն որդւոցն Իսրայէլի՝ որպէս մոլորեցան Ղեւտացիքն։
11 Այս բաժինը Սադոկի որդիներից՝ սրբագործուած քահանաներինը կը լինի, որոնք Տիրոջ Տտան պահպանութիւնն են կատարում, որոնք չմոլորուեցին իսրայէլացիների մոլորութեամբ, ինչպէս մոլորուեցին ղեւտացիները:
11 Այս բաժինը Սադովկի որդիներէն սրբուած քահանաներուն պիտի ըլլայ, որոնք իմ պահպանութիւնս ըրին։ Ու երբ Իսրայէլի որդիները մոլորեցան, անոնք չմոլորեցան, ինչպէս Ղեւտացիները մոլորեցան։
քահանայիցն սրբեցելոց, որդւոցն Սադովկայ, որք [1033]պահեն զպահպանութիւնս տանն Տեառն``, որք ոչ մոլորեցան ի մոլորութիւն որդւոցն Իսրայելի` որպէս մոլորեցան Ղեւտացիքն:

48:11: քահանայիցն սրբեցելոց որդւոցն Սադովկայ, որք պահեն զպահպանութիւնս տանն Տեառն. որք ո՛չ մոլորեցան ՚ի մոլորութիւն որդւոցն Իսրայէլի՝ որպէս մոլորեցան Ղեւտացիքն։
11 Այս բաժինը Սադոկի որդիներից՝ սրբագործուած քահանաներինը կը լինի, որոնք Տիրոջ Տտան պահպանութիւնն են կատարում, որոնք չմոլորուեցին իսրայէլացիների մոլորութեամբ, ինչպէս մոլորուեցին ղեւտացիները:
11 Այս բաժինը Սադովկի որդիներէն սրբուած քահանաներուն պիտի ըլլայ, որոնք իմ պահպանութիւնս ըրին։ Ու երբ Իսրայէլի որդիները մոլորեցան, անոնք չմոլորեցան, ինչպէս Ղեւտացիները մոլորեցան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1148:11 Это посвятите священникам из сынов Садока, которые стояли на страже Моей, которые во время отступничества сынов Израилевых не отступили от Меня, как отступили {другие} левиты.
48:11 τοῖς ο the ἱερεῦσι ιερευς priest τοῖς ο the ἡγιασμένοις αγιαζω hallow υἱοῖς υιος son Σαδδουκ σαδδουκ the φυλάσσουσι φυλασσω guard; keep τὰς ο the φυλακὰς φυλακη prison; watch τοῦ ο the οἴκου οικος home; household οἵτινες οστις who; that οὐκ ου not ἐπλανήθησαν πλαναω mislead; wander ἐν εν in τῇ ο the πλανήσει πλανησις son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ὃν ος who; what τρόπον τροπος manner; by means ἐπλανήθησαν πλαναω mislead; wander οἱ ο the Λευῖται λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
48:11 לַ la לְ to † הַ the כֹּהֲנִ֤ים kkōhᵃnˈîm כֹּהֵן priest הַֽ hˈa הַ the מְקֻדָּשׁ֙ mᵊquddˌāš קדשׁ be holy מִ mi מִן from בְּנֵ֣י bbᵊnˈê בֵּן son צָדֹ֔וק ṣāḏˈôq צָדֹוק Zadok אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] שָׁמְר֖וּ šāmᵊrˌû שׁמר keep מִשְׁמַרְתִּ֑י mišmartˈî מִשְׁמֶרֶת guard-post אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] לֹֽא־ lˈō- לֹא not תָע֗וּ ṯāʕˈû תעה err בִּ bi בְּ in תְעֹות֙ ṯᵊʕôṯ תעה err בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel כַּ ka כְּ as אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] תָּע֖וּ tāʕˌû תעה err הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּֽם׃ ס lᵊwiyyˈim . s לֵוִי Levite
48:11. sacerdotibus sanctuarium erit de filiis Sadoc qui custodierunt caerimonias meas et non erraverunt cum errarent filii Israhel sicut erraverunt et LevitaeThe sanctuary shall be for the priests of the sons of Sadoc, who kept my ceremonies, and went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites also went astray.
11. for the priests that are sanctified of the sons of Zadok, which have kept my charge; which went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites went astray.
48:11. The sanctuary shall be for the priests from the sons of Zadok, who observed my ceremonies and did not go astray, when the sons of Israel went astray, just as the Levites also went astray.
for the priests that are sanctified of the sons of Zadok; which have kept my charge, which went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites went astray:

48:11 Это посвятите священникам из сынов Садока, которые стояли на страже Моей, которые во время отступничества сынов Израилевых не отступили от Меня, как отступили {другие} левиты.
48:11
τοῖς ο the
ἱερεῦσι ιερευς priest
τοῖς ο the
ἡγιασμένοις αγιαζω hallow
υἱοῖς υιος son
Σαδδουκ σαδδουκ the
φυλάσσουσι φυλασσω guard; keep
τὰς ο the
φυλακὰς φυλακη prison; watch
τοῦ ο the
οἴκου οικος home; household
οἵτινες οστις who; that
οὐκ ου not
ἐπλανήθησαν πλαναω mislead; wander
ἐν εν in
τῇ ο the
πλανήσει πλανησις son
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
ὃν ος who; what
τρόπον τροπος manner; by means
ἐπλανήθησαν πλαναω mislead; wander
οἱ ο the
Λευῖται λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
48:11
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
כֹּהֲנִ֤ים kkōhᵃnˈîm כֹּהֵן priest
הַֽ hˈa הַ the
מְקֻדָּשׁ֙ mᵊquddˌāš קדשׁ be holy
מִ mi מִן from
בְּנֵ֣י bbᵊnˈê בֵּן son
צָדֹ֔וק ṣāḏˈôq צָדֹוק Zadok
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
שָׁמְר֖וּ šāmᵊrˌû שׁמר keep
מִשְׁמַרְתִּ֑י mišmartˈî מִשְׁמֶרֶת guard-post
אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
לֹֽא־ lˈō- לֹא not
תָע֗וּ ṯāʕˈû תעה err
בִּ bi בְּ in
תְעֹות֙ ṯᵊʕôṯ תעה err
בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
כַּ ka כְּ as
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
תָּע֖וּ tāʕˌû תעה err
הַ ha הַ the
לְוִיִּֽם׃ ס lᵊwiyyˈim . s לֵוִי Levite
48:11. sacerdotibus sanctuarium erit de filiis Sadoc qui custodierunt caerimonias meas et non erraverunt cum errarent filii Israhel sicut erraverunt et Levitae
The sanctuary shall be for the priests of the sons of Sadoc, who kept my ceremonies, and went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites also went astray.
11. for the priests that are sanctified of the sons of Zadok, which have kept my charge; which went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites went astray.
48:11. The sanctuary shall be for the priests from the sons of Zadok, who observed my ceremonies and did not go astray, when the sons of Israel went astray, just as the Levites also went astray.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
11. “Это посвятите священникам”, в евр. “священникам посвященное”; посему LXX: “жерцм, освященным”: так и Таргум, Пешито и новейшие. См. объяснение XLIV:15, 10.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:11: It shall be for the priests that are sanctified: or, The sanctified portion shall be for the priests
the sons: Eze 40:46, Eze 43:19, Eze 44:15, Eze 44:16
charge: or, ward, or ordinance, Mat 24:45, Mat 24:45, Mat 24:46; Ti2 4:7, Ti2 4:8; Pe1 5:4; Rev 2:10
as the Levites: Eze 44:10
John Gill
48:11 It shall be for the priests that are sanctified,.... That are set apart by the Lord; called by him to this office, and sanctified with the gifts and graces of his Spirit; and so fitted and qualified for the work:
of the sons of Zadok, which have kept my charge, which went not astray when the children of Israel went astray, as the Levites went astray; ministers faithful to the Lord in the worst of times; and who are and wil be taken notice of by him, both now and hereafter, Mt 25:21; see Gill on Ezek 44:15, Ezek 44:16.
48:1248:12: Եւ եղիցի նոցա պտուղ տուեալ ՚ի պտղոյ երկրին սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն, ՚ի սահմանաց Ղեւտացւոցն[13099]։ [13099] Ոմանք. ՚Ի պտղոց երկրին։
12 Ղեւտացիների սահմաններից ընծայուած հողերի այս բաժինն ամենասուրբ մասը կը լինի:
12 Երկրին ընծայէն՝ այս ընծան անոնց համար ամենասուրբ պիտի ըլլայ՝ Ղեւտացիներու սահմանին քով։
Եւ եղիցի նոցա [1034]պտուղ տուեալ ի պտղոյ`` երկրին սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն, ի սահմանաց Ղեւտացւոցն:

48:12: Եւ եղիցի նոցա պտուղ տուեալ ՚ի պտղոյ երկրին սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն, ՚ի սահմանաց Ղեւտացւոցն[13099]։
[13099] Ոմանք. ՚Ի պտղոց երկրին։
12 Ղեւտացիների սահմաններից ընծայուած հողերի այս բաժինն ամենասուրբ մասը կը լինի:
12 Երկրին ընծայէն՝ այս ընծան անոնց համար ամենասուրբ պիտի ըլլայ՝ Ղեւտացիներու սահմանին քով։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1248:12 Им будет принадлежать эта часть земли из священного участка, святыня из святынь, у предела левитов.
48:12 καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him ἡ ο the ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit δεδομένη διδωμι give; deposit ἐκ εκ from; out of τῶν ο the ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land ἅγιον αγιος holy ἁγίων αγιος holy ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Λευιτῶν λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
48:12 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיְתָ֨ה hāyᵊṯˌā היה be לָהֶ֧ם lāhˈem לְ to תְּרוּמִיָּ֛ה tᵊrûmiyyˈā תְּרוּמִיָּה contribution מִ mi מִן from תְּרוּמַ֥ת ttᵊrûmˌaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth קֹ֣דֶשׁ qˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness קָדָשִׁ֑ים qoḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to גְּב֖וּל gᵊvˌûl גְּבוּל boundary הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּֽם׃ lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite
48:12. et erunt eis primitiae de primitiis terrae sanctum sanctorum iuxta terminum LevitarumAnd for them shall be the firstfruits of the firstfruits of the land holy of holies, by the border of the Levites,
12. And it shall be unto them an oblation from the oblation of the land, a thing most holy, by the border of the Levites.
48:12. And so the foremost of the first-fruits of the land, the Holy of Holies, beside the border of the Levites, shall be for them.
And [this] oblation of the land that is offered shall be unto them a thing most holy by the border of the Levites:

48:12 Им будет принадлежать эта часть земли из священного участка, святыня из святынь, у предела левитов.
48:12
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him
ἡ ο the
ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit
δεδομένη διδωμι give; deposit
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τῶν ο the
ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit
τῆς ο the
γῆς γη earth; land
ἅγιον αγιος holy
ἁγίων αγιος holy
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Λευιτῶν λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
48:12
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיְתָ֨ה hāyᵊṯˌā היה be
לָהֶ֧ם lāhˈem לְ to
תְּרוּמִיָּ֛ה tᵊrûmiyyˈā תְּרוּמִיָּה contribution
מִ mi מִן from
תְּרוּמַ֥ת ttᵊrûmˌaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution
הָ hā הַ the
אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
קֹ֣דֶשׁ qˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
קָדָשִׁ֑ים qoḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
גְּב֖וּל gᵊvˌûl גְּבוּל boundary
הַ ha הַ the
לְוִיִּֽם׃ lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite
48:12. et erunt eis primitiae de primitiis terrae sanctum sanctorum iuxta terminum Levitarum
And for them shall be the firstfruits of the firstfruits of the land holy of holies, by the border of the Levites,
12. And it shall be unto them an oblation from the oblation of the land, a thing most holy, by the border of the Levites.
48:12. And so the foremost of the first-fruits of the land, the Holy of Holies, beside the border of the Levites, shall be for them.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
12. “Эта часть земли из священного участка”, по-евр. терумийа из терумы, первое слово какое-то образование от терума может быть, с отвлеченным или усиленным значением: особенная терума; LXX: “начаток дамый”. - “Святыня из святынь” “кодеш кодашим”, евр. слав. “Святое Cвятых” святейшая часть земли, так как здесь находился храм; служа специальным названием святого святых, это выражение и у Моисея, и у Иезекииля имеет и общий смысл - величайшей святости (XLI:4; XLIII:12; XLV:3). Левитский участок называется просто “святыней” (ст. 14). - “У предела левитов”. Так как исчисление участков у Иезекииля идет с севера на юг, то это выражение должно было бы обозначать, что участок священников на юге граничит с левитским; но тогда храм не приходился бы, как то требуется 8: ст., в середине всей терумы (священного участка): посему левитский участок надо полагать на север, а не на юг священнического; следовательно, пророк здесь отступает от своего порядка в описании (с с. на ю.) и из всей терумы говорит ранее о центре ее - священническом участке в виду его особенной святости.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:12: a thing: Eze 45:4; Lev 27:21
John Gill
48:12 And this oblation of the land that is offered shall be unto them a thing most holy,.... Be peculiarly theirs, and not converted to any other use; but be accounted most sacred, and not alienable, or made use of by other persons, or to other purposes by the border of the Levites; it should be continued, and reach unto their border; or where that should begin, and their part assigned them, which is next considered.
48:1348:13: Եւ Ղեւտացւոցն որ զհետ սահմանաց քահանայիցն, եղիցէ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար՝ եւ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար[13100]. [13100] Բազումք. Քահանայիցն իցէ. յերկայնութիւն։
13 Իսկ քահանաներին սահմանակից ղեւտացիների բաժինը, կը լինի քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ ու տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ:
13 Քահանաներուն սահմանին քով Ղեւտացիներուն բաժինը պէտք է ըլլայ քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ երկայն ու տասը հազար եղէգ՝ լայն։ Բոլոր երկայնութիւնը քսանըհինգ հազար ու լայնութիւնը տասը հազար ըլլայ։
Եւ Ղեւտացւոցն որ [1035]զհետ սահմանաց`` քահանայիցն` իցէ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար, եւ ի լայնութիւն տասն [1036]հազար:

48:13: Եւ Ղեւտացւոցն որ զհետ սահմանաց քահանայիցն, եղիցէ յերկայնութիւն քսան եւ հինգ հազար՝ եւ ՚ի լայնութիւն տասն հազար[13100].
[13100] Բազումք. Քահանայիցն իցէ. յերկայնութիւն։
13 Իսկ քահանաներին սահմանակից ղեւտացիների բաժինը, կը լինի քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ ու տասը հազար ձողաչափ լայնութեամբ:
13 Քահանաներուն սահմանին քով Ղեւտացիներուն բաժինը պէտք է ըլլայ քսանըհինգ հազար եղէգ երկայն ու տասը հազար եղէգ՝ լայն։ Բոլոր երկայնութիւնը քսանըհինգ հազար ու լայնութիւնը տասը հազար ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1348:13 И левиты получат также у священнического предела двадцать пять тысяч в длину и десять тысяч {тростей} в ширину; вся длина двадцать пять тысяч, а ширина десять тысяч {тростей}.
48:13 τοῖς ο the δὲ δε though; while Λευίταις λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis τὰ ο the ἐχόμενα εχω have; hold τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the ἱερέων ιερευς priest μῆκος μηκος length πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even εὖρος ευρος ten χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand πᾶν πας all; every τὸ ο the μῆκος μηκος length πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even εὖρος ευρος twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
48:13 וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּ֗ם lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite לְ lᵊ לְ to עֻמַּת֙ ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary הַ ha הַ the כֹּהֲנִ֔ים kkōhᵃnˈîm כֹּהֵן priest חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֥ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֨לֶף֙ ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand אֹ֔רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length וְ wᵊ וְ and רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִ֑ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole אֹ֗רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:13. sed et Levitis similiter iuxta fines sacerdotum viginti quinque milia longitudinis et latitudinis decem milia omnis longitudo viginti et quinque milium et latitudo decem miliumAnd the Levites in like manner shall have by the borders of the priests five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth. All the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand.
13. And answerable unto the border of the priests, the Levites shall have five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth: all the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand.
48:13. But also the Levites, similarly, shall have, beside the borders of the priests, twenty-five thousand in length, and ten thousand in width. The entire length shall be twenty-five thousand, and the width shall be ten thousand.
And over against the border of the priests the Levites [shall have] five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth: all the length [shall be] five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand:

48:13 И левиты получат также у священнического предела двадцать пять тысяч в длину и десять тысяч {тростей} в ширину; вся длина двадцать пять тысяч, а ширина десять тысяч {тростей}.
48:13
τοῖς ο the
δὲ δε though; while
Λευίταις λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
τὰ ο the
ἐχόμενα εχω have; hold
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
ἱερέων ιερευς priest
μῆκος μηκος length
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
εὖρος ευρος ten
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
πᾶν πας all; every
τὸ ο the
μῆκος μηκος length
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
εὖρος ευρος twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
48:13
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הַ ha הַ the
לְוִיִּ֗ם lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֻמַּת֙ ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
הַ ha הַ the
כֹּהֲנִ֔ים kkōhᵃnˈîm כֹּהֵן priest
חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֥ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֨לֶף֙ ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
אֹ֔רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִ֑ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole
אֹ֗רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:13. sed et Levitis similiter iuxta fines sacerdotum viginti quinque milia longitudinis et latitudinis decem milia omnis longitudo viginti et quinque milium et latitudo decem milium
And the Levites in like manner shall have by the borders of the priests five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth. All the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand.
13. And answerable unto the border of the priests, the Levites shall have five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth: all the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand.
48:13. But also the Levites, similarly, shall have, beside the borders of the priests, twenty-five thousand in length, and ten thousand in width. The entire length shall be twenty-five thousand, and the width shall be ten thousand.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
13. “У священнического предела” с севера, см. объяснение 12: ст. - Длина - с в. на з., ширина с с. на ю. - “Вся длина…” - непонятное повторение (явно не в смысле 10: ст.), также как излишнее определение “вся” при длина; посему с LXX нужно понимать кол, весь, независимо: все (???, гаккол), т. е. священнический и левитский участок, и вместо “десять” читать “двадцать” (в ширину); так во всех почти код. LXX; слав. исправлен по-евр. на “десять”. Тем более, что и 14: ст. относится явно не к левитскому лишь участку, а ко всему священному участку (лев. и свящ.). По обыкновению не названа единица меры; см объяснение XLV:2. т.о. левитский участок был равен священническому, но на самом деле больше его, так как не уменьшался громадною площадью храма (1/5: участка), соответственно большему числу левитов.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:13: five and twenty thousand in: Eze 45:3; Deu 12:19; Luk 10:7
John Gill
48:13 And over against the border of the priests,.... Next to their border, close to it, running parallel with it:
the Levites shall have five and twenty thousand in length, and ten thousand in breadth; for accommodations for them; for chambers to lodge in, and other uses; all concerned in the house and worship of God shall be provided for with everything necessary and convenient for them; See Gill on Ezek 45:5,
all the length shall be five and twenty thousand, and the breadth ten thousand; all the length of the land, both for the priests and Levites, should be five and twenty thousand reeds, and the breadth of the land for both ten thousand reeds: this is repeated for the certainty of it, and to prevent any mistake about it.
48:1448:14: ո՛չ վաճառեսցի ՚ի նոցանէն, եւ ո՛չ չափեսցի, եւ ո՛չ առցի առաջին արդեանց երկրին. զի սրբութիւն Տեառն է։
14 Դա չի վաճառուի նրանց կողմից, ոչ էլ կը մասնատուի: Հողի առաջին բերքից չի վերցուի, որովհետեւ այն Տիրոջն է նուիրուած:
14 Անկէ պէտք չէ ծախեն ու փոխեն ու երկրին երախայրին ուրիշի վրայ պէտք չէ դարձնեն, վասն զի անիկա Տէրոջը նուիրուած է։
ոչ վաճառեսցի ի նոցանէն, եւ ոչ չափեսցի, եւ ոչ առցի առաջին արդեանց`` երկրին. զի սրբութիւն Տեառն է:

48:14: ո՛չ վաճառեսցի ՚ի նոցանէն, եւ ո՛չ չափեսցի, եւ ո՛չ առցի առաջին արդեանց երկրին. զի սրբութիւն Տեառն է։
14 Դա չի վաճառուի նրանց կողմից, ոչ էլ կը մասնատուի: Հողի առաջին բերքից չի վերցուի, որովհետեւ այն Տիրոջն է նուիրուած:
14 Անկէ պէտք չէ ծախեն ու փոխեն ու երկրին երախայրին ուրիշի վրայ պէտք չէ դարձնեն, վասն զի անիկա Տէրոջը նուիրուած է։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1448:14 И из этой части они не могут ни продать, ни променять; и начатки земли не могут переходить к другим, потому что это святыня Господня.
48:14 οὐ ου not πραθήσεται πιπρασκω sell ἐξ εκ from; out of αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither καταμετρηθήσεται καταμετρεω not even; neither ἀφαιρεθήσεται αφαιρεω take away τὰ ο the πρωτογενήματα πρωτογενημα the γῆς γη earth; land ὅτι οτι since; that ἅγιόν αγιος holy ἐστιν ειμι be τῷ ο the κυρίῳ κυριος lord; master
48:14 וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹא־ lō- לֹא not יִמְכְּר֣וּ yimkᵊrˈû מכר sell מִמֶּ֗נּוּ mimmˈennû מִן from וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יָמֵ֛ר yāmˈēr מור exchange וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַעֲבִ֖יריעבור *yaʕᵃvˌîr עבר pass רֵאשִׁ֣ית rēšˈîṯ רֵאשִׁית beginning הָ hā הַ the אָ֑רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth כִּי־ kî- כִּי that קֹ֖דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness לַ la לְ to יהוָֽה׃ [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH
48:14. et non venundabunt ex eo neque mutabunt nec transferentur primitiae terrae quia sanctificatae sunt DominoAnd they shall not sell thereof, nor exchange, neither shall the firstfruits of the land be alienated, because they are sanctified to the Lord.
14. And they shall not sell of it, neither exchange it, nor shall the firstfruits of the land be alienated: for it is holy unto the LORD.
48:14. And they shall not sell from it, nor exchange, and the first-fruits of the land shall not be transferred. For these have been sanctified to the Lord.
And they shall not sell of it, neither exchange, nor alienate the firstfruits of the land: for [it is] holy unto the LORD:

48:14 И из этой части они не могут ни продать, ни променять; и начатки земли не могут переходить к другим, потому что это святыня Господня.
48:14
οὐ ου not
πραθήσεται πιπρασκω sell
ἐξ εκ from; out of
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither
καταμετρηθήσεται καταμετρεω not even; neither
ἀφαιρεθήσεται αφαιρεω take away
τὰ ο the
πρωτογενήματα πρωτογενημα the
γῆς γη earth; land
ὅτι οτι since; that
ἅγιόν αγιος holy
ἐστιν ειμι be
τῷ ο the
κυρίῳ κυριος lord; master
48:14
וְ wᵊ וְ and
לֹא־ lō- לֹא not
יִמְכְּר֣וּ yimkᵊrˈû מכר sell
מִמֶּ֗נּוּ mimmˈennû מִן from
וְ wᵊ וְ and
לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not
יָמֵ֛ר yāmˈēr מור exchange
וְ wᵊ וְ and
לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not
יַעֲבִ֖יריעבור
*yaʕᵃvˌîr עבר pass
רֵאשִׁ֣ית rēšˈîṯ רֵאשִׁית beginning
הָ hā הַ the
אָ֑רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
כִּי־ kî- כִּי that
קֹ֖דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
לַ la לְ to
יהוָֽה׃ [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH
48:14. et non venundabunt ex eo neque mutabunt nec transferentur primitiae terrae quia sanctificatae sunt Domino
And they shall not sell thereof, nor exchange, neither shall the firstfruits of the land be alienated, because they are sanctified to the Lord.
14. And they shall not sell of it, neither exchange it, nor shall the firstfruits of the land be alienated: for it is holy unto the LORD.
48:14. And they shall not sell from it, nor exchange, and the first-fruits of the land shall not be transferred. For these have been sanctified to the Lord.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
14. “Что посвящено Богу, на то не имеет права человек; ибо что-либо священно, поскольку оно изъято от соприкосновения со всем не священным и отделено от него” (Берт.). Бог является собственником священного участка (XLV:1, ср. XLIV:28), и, понятно, что служители его, пользующиеся только произведениями его, не могут отчуждать его. Ср. Лев XXV:32-34. - “Не могут ни продать, ни променять”, в евр. один глагол (макар) и не подходящие глагольные формы: в перв. случае в действ. зал. 3: л. мн.ч.. во втором в причинит. зал. З л. ед.ч.; между тем у LXX оба в страд, зал.: “не продастся, ни заментся”, причем второй: katametrhqhsetai (соб. отмеривать). - “Не могут переходить”; евр. авар, переходить, должно быть стало тогда и юридическим термином. - “Начатки земли”, стоящее после “переходит”, относится к всем трем глаголам, под “начатками” разумеется самая земля, а не ее произведение; LXX protogennhmata, слав. неточно: “первая жита”. - “Святыня” не “святыня из святынь” как в 12: ст., потому что речь и о левитском участке, представлявшем меньшую святыню, чем священнический.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:14: they shall: Exo 22:29; Lev 27:10, Lev 27:28, Lev 27:33
for: Eze 48:12; Lev 23:20, Lev 27:9, Lev 27:32; Mal 3:8-10
John Gill
48:14 And they shall not sell of it,.... Any part of it that is allotted to them, neither the priests nor the Levites; simony is not to be practised:
neither exchange; for any other land in lieu of it:
nor alienate the first fruits of the land; or appropriate them to any other use than that of the priests and Levites: whatever is appointed for ecclesiastic uses ought not to be converted to any other; nor should church privileges be parted with on any account: ministers and other officers, nay, even private Christians, should not part with their Christian liberty, nor with any of the doctrines and ordinances of the Gospel:
for it is holy unto the Lord; what is separated and devoted to religious uses is sacred to the Lord.
48:1548:15: Բայց հինգ հազարն աւելո՛րդ լայնութեամբ առ քսան եւ հինգ հազարին, պատուար արտաքոյ քաղաքին լիցին ՚ի բնակութիւն եւ յարձակավայրս նորին. եւ եղիցի քաղաքն ՚ի միջի նորա[13101]։ [13101] Բազումք. Քաղաքին լինիցի ՚ի բնա՛՛։
15 Բայց քսանհինգ հազարից մնացած հինգ հազար լայնութեամբ հողամասը քաղաքի դրսի պատուարը կը լինի, իբրեւ բնակավայր ու ազատ տարածութիւն: Քաղաքը դրա մէջտեղում կը լինի:
15 «Քսանըհինգ հազարին քով լայնութենէն մնացած հինգ հազարը անսուրբ պիտի ըլլայ՝ քաղաքին համար, բնակութեան համար ու արուարձաններուն համար եւ քաղաքը անոր մէջտեղը պէտք է ըլլայ։
Բայց հինգ հազարն աւելորդ լայնութեամբ առ քսան եւ հինգ հազարին, [1037]պատուար արտաքոյ քաղաքին լինիցի`` ի բնակութիւն եւ յարձակավայրս նորին. եւ եղիցի քաղաքն ի միջի նորա:

48:15: Բայց հինգ հազարն աւելո՛րդ լայնութեամբ առ քսան եւ հինգ հազարին, պատուար արտաքոյ քաղաքին լիցին ՚ի բնակութիւն եւ յարձակավայրս նորին. եւ եղիցի քաղաքն ՚ի միջի նորա[13101]։
[13101] Բազումք. Քաղաքին լինիցի ՚ի բնա՛՛։
15 Բայց քսանհինգ հազարից մնացած հինգ հազար լայնութեամբ հողամասը քաղաքի դրսի պատուարը կը լինի, իբրեւ բնակավայր ու ազատ տարածութիւն: Քաղաքը դրա մէջտեղում կը լինի:
15 «Քսանըհինգ հազարին քով լայնութենէն մնացած հինգ հազարը անսուրբ պիտի ըլլայ՝ քաղաքին համար, բնակութեան համար ու արուարձաններուն համար եւ քաղաքը անոր մէջտեղը պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1548:15 А остальные пять тысяч в ширину с двадцатью пятью тысячами {в длину} назначаются для города в общее употребление, на заселение и на предместья; город будет в средине.
48:15 τὰς ο the δὲ δε though; while πέντε πεντε five χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand τὰς ο the περισσὰς περισσος overflowing; superfluous ἐπὶ επι in; on τῷ ο the πλάτει πλατυς broad; street ἐπὶ επι in; on ταῖς ο the πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάσιν χιλιας thousand προτείχισμα προτειχισμα be τῇ ο the πόλει πολις city εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the κατοικίαν κατοικια settlement καὶ και and; even εἰς εις into; for διάστημα διαστημα interval αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἡ ο the πόλις πολις city ἐν εν in μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
48:15 וַ wa וְ and חֲמֵ֨שֶׁת ḥᵃmˌēšeṯ חָמֵשׁ five אֲלָפִ֜ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand הַ ha הַ the נֹּותָ֣ר nnôṯˈār יתר remain בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the רֹ֗חַב rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon פְּנֵ֨י pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand חֹֽל־ ḥˈōl- חֹל profane ה֣וּא hˈû הוּא he לָ lā לְ to † הַ the עִ֔יר ʕˈîr עִיר town לְ lᵊ לְ to מֹושָׁ֖ב môšˌāv מֹושָׁב seat וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to מִגְרָ֑שׁ miḡrˈāš מִגְרָשׁ pasture וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיְתָ֥ה hāyᵊṯˌā היה be הָ hā הַ the עִ֖יר ʕˌîr עִיר town בְּב *bᵊ בְּ in תֹוכֹֽותוכה *ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:15. quinque milia autem quae supersunt in latitudine per viginti quinque milia profana erunt urbis in habitaculum et in suburbana et erit civitas in medio eiusBut the five thousand that remain in the breadth over against the five and twenty thousand, shall be a profane place for the city for dwelling, and for suburbs and the city shall be in the midst thereof.
15. And the five thousand that are left in the breadth, in front of the five and twenty thousand, shall be for common use, for the city, for dwelling and for suburbs: and the city shall be in the midst thereof.
48:15. But the five thousand that is left over, out of the twenty-five thousand in width, will be a profane place of the city for dwelling and for the suburbs. And the city shall be in the center.
And the five thousand, that are left in the breadth over against the five and twenty thousand, shall be a profane [place] for the city, for dwelling, and for suburbs: and the city shall be in the midst thereof:

48:15 А остальные пять тысяч в ширину с двадцатью пятью тысячами {в длину} назначаются для города в общее употребление, на заселение и на предместья; город будет в средине.
48:15
τὰς ο the
δὲ δε though; while
πέντε πεντε five
χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand
τὰς ο the
περισσὰς περισσος overflowing; superfluous
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τῷ ο the
πλάτει πλατυς broad; street
ἐπὶ επι in; on
ταῖς ο the
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάσιν χιλιας thousand
προτείχισμα προτειχισμα be
τῇ ο the
πόλει πολις city
εἰς εις into; for
τὴν ο the
κατοικίαν κατοικια settlement
καὶ και and; even
εἰς εις into; for
διάστημα διαστημα interval
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἡ ο the
πόλις πολις city
ἐν εν in
μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
48:15
וַ wa וְ and
חֲמֵ֨שֶׁת ḥᵃmˌēšeṯ חָמֵשׁ five
אֲלָפִ֜ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
הַ ha הַ the
נֹּותָ֣ר nnôṯˈār יתר remain
בָּ bā בְּ in
† הַ the
רֹ֗חַב rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
פְּנֵ֨י pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face
חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
חֹֽל־ ḥˈōl- חֹל profane
ה֣וּא hˈû הוּא he
לָ lā לְ to
† הַ the
עִ֔יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
לְ lᵊ לְ to
מֹושָׁ֖ב môšˌāv מֹושָׁב seat
וּ û וְ and
לְ lᵊ לְ to
מִגְרָ֑שׁ miḡrˈāš מִגְרָשׁ pasture
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיְתָ֥ה hāyᵊṯˌā היה be
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֖יר ʕˌîr עִיר town
בְּב
*bᵊ בְּ in
תֹוכֹֽותוכה
*ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:15. quinque milia autem quae supersunt in latitudine per viginti quinque milia profana erunt urbis in habitaculum et in suburbana et erit civitas in medio eius
But the five thousand that remain in the breadth over against the five and twenty thousand, shall be a profane place for the city for dwelling, and for suburbs and the city shall be in the midst thereof.
15. And the five thousand that are left in the breadth, in front of the five and twenty thousand, shall be for common use, for the city, for dwelling and for suburbs: and the city shall be in the midst thereof.
48:15. But the five thousand that is left over, out of the twenty-five thousand in width, will be a profane place of the city for dwelling and for the suburbs. And the city shall be in the center.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
15. Хотя священным участком считаются уделы только священников и левитов, но и весь квадраток, часть которого составляют эти уделы, уже от этого одного становится не заурядным. Притом остальная часть этого квадратка, именно юг его и восточная с западной окраины принадлежат владетелям, наиболее приближающимся, по святости или, по крайней мере, по значение своему, к священно- и церковнослужителям - именно столице св. земли и князю ее. Отсюда понятно, почему в представлении пророка последних два владения составляют с первым (священным участком) нечто одно. Тем не менее, то и другое - участок городской и княжеский - не составляют в собственном смысле чего-либо священного. - “Остальные” в квадратке между Иудиным и Вениаминовым уделом. - “На общее употребление”, евр. гу хол. Вульг. profana erunt, - не священное, см. объяснение XLII:20, LXX свободно: proteicima, предградие, Ак. bebhlon, Сим. и Феод. laikon. — «Предместья», евр. >миграш,> — или выгон, пастбище; LXX — diasthma, расстояние (чтобы было расстояние между городом и храмом).
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:15: And the five thousand that are left - The territory of the Levites was twenty-five thousand square cubits, Eze 48:20, But their city was only four thousand five hundred square cubits, see Eze 48:13 and Eze 48:16; there remained, therefore, ten thousand cubits square to be divided, of which five thousand cubits in breadth, by twenty-five thousand in length, on the east and west sides, were reserved for a sort of second city; or for suburbs where laymen might dwell who were employed by those priests and Levites who lodged in the temple and in the city, Eze 48:18. And another space of one thousand cubits in breadth, by twenty-five thousand in length, which extended only from north to south, was for fields and gardens appointed for the support of those lay servants. On which we may remark, there was no cultivated land between the portion of the Levites and that of the prince, but only on the east and west sides. See Eze 45:6, and the map FF.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:15: The five thousand ... - The remainder of the square of 25, 000 reeds from north to south.
Profane - For common use, as distinguished from that which is holy unto the Lord.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:15: a profane: Eze 22:26, Eze 42:20, Eze 44:23, Eze 45:6
for the city: The holy oblation of 25, 000 square reeds, or near fifty square miles, was divided into three parts from north to south (see note on Eze 45:1); a portion on the north of 10, 000 reeds in width, and 25, 000 in length, for the priests, in the midst of which was the sanctuary or temple, surrounded by a wall 500 reeds square (Eze 48:9, Eze 48:10; see note on Eze 42:15); next to this another portion of the same dimensions for the Levites (Eze 48:13, Eze 48:14); and on the south another portion of the same length, but only 5, 000 reeds in breadth, for the city (Eze 48:15). The city was situated in the midst of this portion, being 4, 500 reeds, or about nine miles square (Eze 48:30), having a suburb of 250 reeds, or about half a mile, on each side (Eze 48:17), leaving 10, 000 reeds or nearly ten miles, on the east side, and the same on the west side, for the profit of those who serve the city out of all the tribes (Eze 48:18, Eze 48:19). On the east and west sides of this square of 25, 000 reeds, is the portion of the prince; each of which, estimating the breadth of the land at 150 miles, would form a square of fifty miles. Thus the whole plan of the division of the country, laying out of the city, temple, and all its appendages, is perfectly regular and uniform; and would therefore convey to the minds of the Jews the most complete idea they were capable of conceiving of the most perfect church, commonwealth, city, temple, and conveniences, on the largest and grandest scale for the Divine worship; and it doubtless ultimately points out the land of Immanuel, the city of the New Jerusalem, and his temple, the Christian church, the house of the living God. Ti1 3:15
John Gill
48:15 And the five thousand that are left in the breadth over against the five and twenty thousand,.... Which belonged to the Levites, which was a square of twenty five thousand reeds by twenty five thousand; by the side of, or parallel to, the twenty five thousand in length, ran twenty five thousand in breadth, two ten thousands, as in the portion of the priests, Ezek 48:10 so in theirs, Ezek 48:13, the residue whereof, five thousand,
shall be a profane place for the city, for dwelling, and for suburbs; to build a city upon for the Israelites to dwell in, and suburbs to be inhabited by those that were not of the city; or for fields and gardens, to supply the city with things necessary and convenient; though the Jewish commentators, Jarchi, Kimchi, and Ben Melech, say the suburbs were an open place, where were neither houses, nor fields, nor gardens: when this spot for the city and suburbs is said to be a "profane place", it is to be understood comparatively, with respect to the portion for the priests and Levites; otherwise it was a part of the holy oblation; or rather, that it was common to all the people of Israel, who might all dwell in it; and therefore Symmachus and Theodotion render it This "city" signifies the Gospel church, often compared to a city in Scripture, being compact together; consisting of Christians knit together in love, of the same sentiment, and joining in religious worship: a city seated on an eminence; well founded; built on the rock Christ Jesus; its buildings large and beautiful, and of lively stones; its inhabitants many, the fellow citizens of the saints; these inhabitants, of all nations, of every rank, age, and sex; and very healthful, none of them sick and diseased; healed of all maladies; living in a wholesome air, by a river, the streams whereof make glad this city, and the inhabitants of it; who have many privileges, being Christ's freemen; governed by good laws, under proper officers appointed to explain them, and see them executed: a city well fortified with the bulwarks of salvation; the city of solemnities, and of the great King. The suburbs of it are for such who are not yet of it, but are waiting at Wisdom's gates, and at the posts of her door, hoping for admittance ere long:
and the city shall be in the midst thereof; of the area of five thousand reeds.
John Wesley
48:15 A profane place - A common, not consecrated place.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:15 The five thousand rods, apportioned to the city out of the twenty-five thousand square, are to be laid off in a square of four thousand five hundred, with the two hundred fifty all around for suburbs.
profane--that is, not strictly sacred as the sacerdotal portions, but applied to secular uses.
48:1648:16: Եւ ա՛յս է չափ նորա. ՚ի կողմանէ հիւսւսոյ՝ չո՛րք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ հարաւոյ՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ արեւելից՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ ծովուն՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր[13102]։ [13102] Յոմանս պակասի. Եւ այս է չափ նորա... եւ հինգ հարիւր, եւ ՚ի կողմանէ հարաւոյ՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր, եւ ՚ի կող՛՛։
16 Սրանք են նրա չափերը. հիւսիսային կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ, հարաւային կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր, արեւելեան կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ արեւմտեան կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր:
16 Անոր չափերը ասոնք ըլլան՝ հիւսիսային կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ հարաւային կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ արեւելեան կողմը չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ու արեւմտեան կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եղէգ։
Եւ այս է չափ նորա. ի կողմանէ հիւսիսոյ` չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր, եւ ի կողմանէ հարաւոյ` չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր, եւ ի կողմանէ արեւելից` չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր, եւ ի կողմանէ ծովուն` չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր:

48:16: Եւ ա՛յս է չափ նորա. ՚ի կողմանէ հիւսւսոյ՝ չո՛րք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ հարաւոյ՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ արեւելից՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր. եւ ՚ի կողմանէ ծովուն՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր[13102]։
[13102] Յոմանս պակասի. Եւ այս է չափ նորա... եւ հինգ հարիւր, եւ ՚ի կողմանէ հարաւոյ՝ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր, եւ ՚ի կող՛՛։
16 Սրանք են նրա չափերը. հիւսիսային կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ, հարաւային կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր, արեւելեան կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ արեւմտեան կողմից՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր:
16 Անոր չափերը ասոնք ըլլան՝ հիւսիսային կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ հարաւային կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եւ արեւելեան կողմը չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ու արեւմտեան կողմը՝ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր եղէգ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1648:16 И вот размеры его: северная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот и южная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот, восточная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот и западная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот {тростей}.
48:16 καὶ και and; even ταῦτα ουτος this; he τὰ ο the μέτρα μετρον measure αὐτῆς αυτος he; him ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred καὶ και and; even τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred καὶ και and; even τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred καὶ και and; even τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea τετρακισχιλίους τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand πεντακοσίους πεντακοσιοι five hundred
48:16 וְ wᵊ וְ and אֵלֶּה֮ ʔēlleh אֵלֶּה these מִדֹּותֶיהָ֒ middôṯeʸhˌā מִדָּה measured stretch פְּאַ֣ת pᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner צָפֹ֗ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וּ û וְ and פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner נֶ֕גֶב nˈeḡev נֶגֶב south חֲמֵ֥שׁחֲמֵ֥שׁ חמשׁ *ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹ֖ות mēʔˌôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֑ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וּ û וְ and מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֣ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֗ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וּ û וְ and פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֕מָּה yˈommā יָם sea חֲמֵ֥שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹ֖ות mēʔˌôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֥עַת ʔarbˌaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:16. et heae mensurae eius ad plagam septentrionalem quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam meridianam quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam orientalem quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam occidentalem quingenti et quattuor miliaAnd these are the measures thereof: on the north side four thousand and five hundred: and on the south side four thousand and five hundred: and on the east side four thousand and five hundred: and on the west side four thousand and five hundred.
16. And these shall be the measures thereof; the north side four thousand and five hundred; and the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred.
48:16. And these shall be its measurements: on the northern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the southern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the eastern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the western side, four thousand and five hundred.
And these [shall be] the measures thereof; the north side four thousand and five hundred, and the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred:

48:16 И вот размеры его: северная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот и южная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот, восточная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот и западная сторона четыре тысячи пятьсот {тростей}.
48:16
καὶ και and; even
ταῦτα ουτος this; he
τὰ ο the
μέτρα μετρον measure
αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
καὶ και and; even
τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
καὶ και and; even
τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
καὶ και and; even
τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
τετρακισχιλίους τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
πεντακοσίους πεντακοσιοι five hundred
48:16
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֵלֶּה֮ ʔēlleh אֵלֶּה these
מִדֹּותֶיהָ֒ middôṯeʸhˌā מִדָּה measured stretch
פְּאַ֣ת pᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
צָפֹ֗ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וּ û וְ and
פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
נֶ֕גֶב nˈeḡev נֶגֶב south
חֲמֵ֥שׁחֲמֵ֥שׁ חמשׁ
*ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹ֖ות mēʔˌôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֑ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וּ û וְ and
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֣ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֗ים qāḏˈîm קָדִים east
חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וּ û וְ and
פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֕מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
חֲמֵ֥שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹ֖ות mēʔˌôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֥עַת ʔarbˌaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִֽים׃ ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
48:16. et heae mensurae eius ad plagam septentrionalem quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam meridianam quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam orientalem quingenti et quattuor milia et ad plagam occidentalem quingenti et quattuor milia
And these are the measures thereof: on the north side four thousand and five hundred: and on the south side four thousand and five hundred: and on the east side four thousand and five hundred: and on the west side four thousand and five hundred.
16. And these shall be the measures thereof; the north side four thousand and five hundred; and the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred.
48:16. And these shall be its measurements: on the northern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the southern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the eastern side, four thousand and five hundred; and on the western side, four thousand and five hundred.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
16. Город, как и храм, представлял из себя правильный квадрат в 10: раз больший храма (ср. объяснение ст. 17: и XLII:20). Если единица меры здесь, как думают нов., локоть, то город имеет в окружности около 9: километров (8: 1/2: вер.); по И. Флавию Иерусалим его времени имел в окружности 33: стадии = 6: километров. Если единица меры, что вероятнее, трость, то окружность около 50: километров (громадная: Иер XXXI:38, 39; Откр XXI:16). - “Пятьсот”, дважды в евр., посему второе в кери опускается и в пунктиров. тексте ставится без знаков: “прекрасный пример диттографии” (Берт.).
Geneva 1599
48:16 And these [shall be] the measures of it; the north side
(c) four thousand and five hundred, and the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred.
(c) Meaning that it would be square.
John Gill
48:16 And this shall be the measures thereof,.... Of the city:
the north side four thousand and five hundred; that is, measures or reeds:
the south side four thousand and five hundred, and on the east side four thousand and five hundred, and the west side four thousand and five hundred; in all eighteen hundred measures or reeds, as in Ezek 48:35 which denotes the largeness of the Gospel church, especially in the latter day; when Jews and Gentiles will be converted, and multitudes, east, west, north and south, will be gathered to it; and as it is an equilateral square, this shows the perfection, firmness, stability, and duration of the church of Christ; so the holy city, the New Jerusalem, is for the same reasons said to be foursquare, Rev_ 21:16.
John Wesley
48:16 The measures thereof - The extent and proportions of the city, a square of four thousand five hundred shall be taken out of the middle of the twenty five thousand or the ground - plat of the city. So it shall be an equilateral square, every side exactly the same, north, south, east, and west, four thousand five hundred apiece, by which measures the whole content is visible eighteen thousand cubits not reeds.
48:1748:17: Եւ եղիցի բացատ քաղաքին ընդ հիւսւսի՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ հարաւ՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ արեւելս՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ ծով՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն[13103]։ [13103] Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ յիսուն, եւ ընդ ծով երկերիւր եւ յիսուն։
17 Քաղաքի ազատ տարածքը կը լինի. հիւսիսի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ձողաչափ, հարաւի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն, արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եւ արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն:
17 Եւ քաղաքին արուարձանը դէպի հիւսիս՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ու դէպի հարաւ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եւ դէպի արեւելք՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ու դէպի արեւմուտք՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եղէգ պէտք է ըլլայ։
Եւ եղիցի բացատ քաղաքին ընդ հիւսիսի` երկերիւր եւ յիսուն, եւ ընդ հարաւ` երկերիւր եւ յիսուն, եւ ընդ արեւելս` երկերիւր եւ յիսուն, եւ ընդ ծով` երկերիւր եւ յիսուն:

48:17: Եւ եղիցի բացատ քաղաքին ընդ հիւսւսի՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ հարաւ՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ արեւելս՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն. եւ ընդ ծով՝ երկերիւր եւ յիսուն[13103]։
[13103] Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ յիսուն, եւ ընդ ծով երկերիւր եւ յիսուն։
17 Քաղաքի ազատ տարածքը կը լինի. հիւսիսի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ձողաչափ, հարաւի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն, արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եւ արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն:
17 Եւ քաղաքին արուարձանը դէպի հիւսիս՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ու դէպի հարաւ՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եւ դէպի արեւելք՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն ու դէպի արեւմուտք՝ երկու հարիւր յիսուն եղէգ պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1748:17 А предместья города к северу двести пятьдесят, и к востоку двести пятьдесят, и к югу двести пятьдесят, и к западу двести пятьдесят {тростей}.
48:17 καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be διάστημα διαστημα interval τῇ ο the πόλει πολις city πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred καὶ και and; even πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
48:17 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֣ה hāyˈā היה be מִגְרָשׁ֮ miḡrāš מִגְרָשׁ pasture לָ lā לְ to † הַ the עִיר֒ ʕîr עִיר town צָפֹ֨ונָה֙ ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five וּ û וְ and מָאתַ֔יִם māṯˈayim מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and נֶ֖גְבָּה nˌeḡbā נֶגֶב south חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five וּ û וְ and מָאתָ֑יִם māṯˈāyim מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five וּ û וְ and מָאתַ֔יִם māṯˈayim מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים ḥᵃmiššˌîm חָמֵשׁ five וּ û וְ and מָאתָֽיִם׃ māṯˈāyim מֵאָה hundred
48:17. erunt autem suburbana civitatis ad aquilonem ducenti quinquaginta et in meridie ducenti quinquaginta et ad orientem ducenti quinquaginta et ad mare ducenti quinquagintaAnd the suburbs of the city shall be to the north two hundred and fifty, and the south two hundred and fifty, and to the east two hundred and fifty, and to the sea two hundred and fifty.
17. And the city shall have suburbs; toward the north two hundred and fifty, and toward the south two hundred and fifty, and toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty.
48:17. But the suburbs of the city shall be: to the north, two hundred and fifty; and to the south, two hundred and fifty; and to the east, two hundred and fifty; and to the sea, two hundred and fifty.
And the suburbs of the city shall be toward the north two hundred and fifty, and toward the south two hundred and fifty, and toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty:

48:17 А предместья города к северу двести пятьдесят, и к востоку двести пятьдесят, и к югу двести пятьдесят, и к западу двести пятьдесят {тростей}.
48:17
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
διάστημα διαστημα interval
τῇ ο the
πόλει πολις city
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred
καὶ και and; even
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
διακόσιοι διακοσιοι two hundred
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
48:17
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֣ה hāyˈā היה be
מִגְרָשׁ֮ miḡrāš מִגְרָשׁ pasture
לָ lā לְ to
† הַ the
עִיר֒ ʕîr עִיר town
צָפֹ֨ונָה֙ ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
וּ û וְ and
מָאתַ֔יִם māṯˈayim מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נֶ֖גְבָּה nˌeḡbā נֶגֶב south
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
וּ û וְ and
מָאתָ֑יִם māṯˈāyim מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
וּ û וְ and
מָאתַ֔יִם māṯˈayim מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים ḥᵃmiššˌîm חָמֵשׁ five
וּ û וְ and
מָאתָֽיִם׃ māṯˈāyim מֵאָה hundred
48:17. erunt autem suburbana civitatis ad aquilonem ducenti quinquaginta et in meridie ducenti quinquaginta et ad orientem ducenti quinquaginta et ad mare ducenti quinquaginta
And the suburbs of the city shall be to the north two hundred and fifty, and the south two hundred and fifty, and to the east two hundred and fifty, and to the sea two hundred and fifty.
17. And the city shall have suburbs; toward the north two hundred and fifty, and toward the south two hundred and fifty, and toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty.
48:17. But the suburbs of the city shall be: to the north, two hundred and fifty; and to the south, two hundred and fifty; and to the east, two hundred and fifty; and to the sea, two hundred and fifty.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
17. Предместья, миграш diasthma, расстояние - см. объяснение 15: ст. С предместьями город представлял собою квадрат в круглое число 5000: единиц меры: XLV:6.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:17: The city being 4500 reeds square, 250 reeds are marked off north, south, east, west from the city land.
John Gill
48:17 And the suburbs of the city shall be toward the north two hundred and fifty,.... That is, so many reeds: and
toward the south two hundred and fifty; which make five hundred; and these being added to four thousand five hundred, north and south, make five thousand:
and toward the east two hundred and fifty, and toward the west two hundred and fifty; which being added to four thousand five hundred, east and west, make five thousand; and so an equilateral square on each side, length and breadth.
48:1848:18: Եւ աւելորդ երկայնութեանն մերձ առ երախայրեօք սրբութեանցն տասն հազար ընդ արեւելս, եւ տասն հազար ընդ ծով. եւ եղիցին երախայրիք ՚ի սրբութեանն. եւ եղիցին արդիւնք նորա ՚ի հաց գործաւորի քաղաքին[13104]. [13104] Ոմանք. Երախայրիք սրբութեանն։
18 Իսկ մնացած այն տարածութիւնը, որ մօտ է սրբատեղիներին նուիրուած հողամասին, կ’ունենայ արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ երկարութիւն, արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ՝ տասը հազար: Դա ընծայ կը լինի սրբատեղիներին: Նրա բերքը քաղաքի գործաւորի համար հաց կը լինի.
18 Եւ սուրբ ընծային քով երկայնութենէն մնացած դէպի արեւելք՝ տասը հազարը ու դէպի արեւմուտք՝ տասը հազարը (որ սուրբ ընծային քով է), անոր բերքը քաղաքին ծառայութիւն ընողներուն կերակուր պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ աւելորդ երկայնութեանն մերձ առ [1038]երախայրեօք սրբութեանցն տասն հազար ընդ արեւելս, եւ տասն հազար ընդ ծով. եւ [1039]եղիցին երախայրիք ի սրբութեանն``. եւ եղիցին արդիւնք նորա ի հաց գործաւորի քաղաքին:

48:18: Եւ աւելորդ երկայնութեանն մերձ առ երախայրեօք սրբութեանցն տասն հազար ընդ արեւելս, եւ տասն հազար ընդ ծով. եւ եղիցին երախայրիք ՚ի սրբութեանն. եւ եղիցին արդիւնք նորա ՚ի հաց գործաւորի քաղաքին[13104].
[13104] Ոմանք. Երախայրիք սրբութեանն։
18 Իսկ մնացած այն տարածութիւնը, որ մօտ է սրբատեղիներին նուիրուած հողամասին, կ’ունենայ արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ՝ տասը հազար ձողաչափ երկարութիւն, արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ՝ տասը հազար: Դա ընծայ կը լինի սրբատեղիներին: Նրա բերքը քաղաքի գործաւորի համար հաց կը լինի.
18 Եւ սուրբ ընծային քով երկայնութենէն մնացած դէպի արեւելք՝ տասը հազարը ու դէպի արեւմուտք՝ տասը հազարը (որ սուրբ ընծային քով է), անոր բերքը քաղաքին ծառայութիւն ընողներուն կերակուր պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1848:18 А что остается из длины против священного участка, десять тысяч к востоку и десять тысяч к западу, против священного участка, произведения с этой земли должны быть для продовольствия работающих в городе.
48:18 καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous τοῦ ο the μήκους μηκος length τὸ ο the ἐχόμενον εχω have; hold τῶν ο the ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy δέκα δεκα ten χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east καὶ και and; even δέκα δεκα ten χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea καὶ και and; even ἔσονται ειμι be αἱ ο the ἀπαρχαὶ απαρχη firstfruit τοῦ ο the ἁγίου αγιος holy καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be τὰ ο the γενήματα γεννημα spawn; product αὐτῆς αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for ἄρτους αρτος bread; loaves τοῖς ο the ἐργαζομένοις εργαζομαι work; perform τὴν ο the πόλιν πολις city
48:18 וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the נֹּותָ֨ר nnôṯˌār יתר remain בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the אֹ֜רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length לְ lᵊ לְ to עֻמַּ֣ת׀ ʕummˈaṯ עֻמָּה side תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֗דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִ֤ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east וַ wa וְ and עֲשֶׂ֤רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten אֲלָפִים֙ ʔᵃlāfîm אֶלֶף thousand יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֕ה hāyˈā היה be לְ lᵊ לְ to עֻמַּ֖ת ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֑דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיְתָ֤ה hāyᵊṯˈā היה be תְבֽוּאָתֹו֙תבואתה *ṯᵊvˈûʔāṯô תְּבוּאָה yield לְ lᵊ לְ to לֶ֔חֶם lˈeḥem לֶחֶם bread לְ lᵊ לְ to עֹבְדֵ֖י ʕōvᵊḏˌê עבד work, serve הָ hā הַ the עִֽיר׃ ʕˈîr עִיר town
48:18. quod autem reliquum fuerit in longitudine secundum primitias sanctuarii decem milia in orientem et decem milia ad occidentem erunt sicut primitiae sanctuarii et erunt fruges eius in panes his qui serviunt civitatiAnd the residue in length by the firstfruits of the sanctuary, ten thousand toward the east, and ten thousand toward the west, shall be as the firstfruits of the sanctuary: and the fruit thereof shall be for bread to them that serve the city.
18. And the residue in the length, answerable unto the holy oblation, shall be ten thousand eastward, and ten thousand westward: and it shall be answerable unto the holy oblation; and the increase thereof shall be for food unto them that labour in the city.
48:18. Now what will remain of the length, in accord with the first-fruits of the sanctuary, ten thousand in the east, and ten thousand in the west, shall be as the first-fruits of the sanctuary. And its produce will be for the bread of those who serve the city.
And the residue in length over against the oblation of the holy [portion shall be] ten thousand eastward, and ten thousand westward: and it shall be over against the oblation of the holy [portion]; and the increase thereof shall be for food unto them that serve the city:

48:18 А что остается из длины против священного участка, десять тысяч к востоку и десять тысяч к западу, против священного участка, произведения с этой земли должны быть для продовольствия работающих в городе.
48:18
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous
τοῦ ο the
μήκους μηκος length
τὸ ο the
ἐχόμενον εχω have; hold
τῶν ο the
ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
δέκα δεκα ten
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
καὶ και and; even
δέκα δεκα ten
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
καὶ και and; even
ἔσονται ειμι be
αἱ ο the
ἀπαρχαὶ απαρχη firstfruit
τοῦ ο the
ἁγίου αγιος holy
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
τὰ ο the
γενήματα γεννημα spawn; product
αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
εἰς εις into; for
ἄρτους αρτος bread; loaves
τοῖς ο the
ἐργαζομένοις εργαζομαι work; perform
τὴν ο the
πόλιν πολις city
48:18
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הַ ha הַ the
נֹּותָ֨ר nnôṯˌār יתר remain
בָּ bā בְּ in
† הַ the
אֹ֜רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֻמַּ֣ת׀ ʕummˈaṯ עֻמָּה side
תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֗דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת ʕᵃśˌereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִ֤ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
קָדִ֨ימָה֙ qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
וַ wa וְ and
עֲשֶׂ֤רֶת ʕᵃśˈereṯ עֲשָׂרָה ten
אֲלָפִים֙ ʔᵃlāfîm אֶלֶף thousand
יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֕ה hāyˈā היה be
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֻמַּ֖ת ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side
תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֑דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיְתָ֤ה hāyᵊṯˈā היה be
תְבֽוּאָתֹו֙תבואתה
*ṯᵊvˈûʔāṯô תְּבוּאָה yield
לְ lᵊ לְ to
לֶ֔חֶם lˈeḥem לֶחֶם bread
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֹבְדֵ֖י ʕōvᵊḏˌê עבד work, serve
הָ hā הַ the
עִֽיר׃ ʕˈîr עִיר town
48:18. quod autem reliquum fuerit in longitudine secundum primitias sanctuarii decem milia in orientem et decem milia ad occidentem erunt sicut primitiae sanctuarii et erunt fruges eius in panes his qui serviunt civitati
And the residue in length by the firstfruits of the sanctuary, ten thousand toward the east, and ten thousand toward the west, shall be as the firstfruits of the sanctuary: and the fruit thereof shall be for bread to them that serve the city.
18. And the residue in the length, answerable unto the holy oblation, shall be ten thousand eastward, and ten thousand westward: and it shall be answerable unto the holy oblation; and the increase thereof shall be for food unto them that labour in the city.
48:18. Now what will remain of the length, in accord with the first-fruits of the sanctuary, ten thousand in the east, and ten thousand in the west, shall be as the first-fruits of the sanctuary. And its produce will be for the bread of those who serve the city.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
18. “Работающих в городе” - лат. colere urbem (LXX “делающим град”), - всех жителей его, которых, следовательно, пророк представляет по преимуществу земледельцами (1000: + 1000) х 5000: един. м. земли едва ли было бы достаточно городу в 5000: х 5000: един. м. для пропитания, но имеется в виду будущее плодородие св. земли. - “Против священного участка”. LXX, по-видимому, читали как-то иначе: “и будут начатки святаго”.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:18: Eze 48:18
Then, that serve - i. e., the cultivators or farmers.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:18: that serve: Jos 9:27; Ezra 2:43-58; Neh. 7:46-62
John Gill
48:18 And the residue in length over against the oblation of the holy portion shall be ten thousand eastward, and ten thousand westward,.... What remained in length, which ran parallel with the holy portion of the land, after five thousand reeds were taken out for the city and suburbs, were twenty thousand; ten thousand to the east, and ten thousand to the west:
and it shall be over against the oblation of the holy portion; that is, that space as yet undisposed of, the twenty thousand reeds, ten on the east, and ten on the west of the city, were close to, and ran even with, the oblation of the holy portion assigned to the priests and Levites:
and the increase thereof; or what these twenty thousand reeds of land should produce, or could be made of them:
shall be for food for them that serve the city; not the Gibeonites given to be hewers of wood and drawers of water, as Jarchi interprets it; which sense is justly rejected by Kimchi; since, as he observes, the Gibeonites shall not dwell in Jerusalem the holy city, nor minister in time to come: but either civil magistrates, who serve the church of Christ, when they secure the peace of it, protect and defend it; as they will, especially in the latter day, when these officers will be peace, and these exactors righteousness do all things justly and equitably; and when kings shall be nursing fathers and queens nursing mothers to the church; and it is but right they shall be provided for suitably to their rank, dignity, and office, and tribute be given to whom tribute is due: or ministers of the word, who are the church's servants, and serve it in preaching the Gospel, and administering the ordinances of it; and go by various names, as husbandmen concerned in ploughing, sowing, reaping, and gathering in the harvest; as labourers in the vineyard, and employed in planting, watering, pruning, and propping the vines; and as stewards of the mysteries and manifold grace of God, to give to everyone in the city and family his portion of meat in due season; and as guides and governors, engaged in taking care of the good order and discipline of it; as watchmen, that go about it, or are set on the walls of it: and it is the will of God they should be comfortably provided for, and eat of the fruit of the field and vineyard they labour in; and of the milk of the flock they take care of; and reap carnal things where they have sowed spiritual, things: or else private believers, who serve the interest of Christ and one another by love; praying with and for one another; bearing one another's burdens, and building up each other on their most holy faith: and for whom "food", or "bread" (u), as in the original, both temporal and spiritual, is provided; both being to be had of the Lord, with whom there is enough, and to spare; Christ is the bread of life, and his word and ordinances are the provisions of Zion; which all that serve the city or church of God may partake of.
(u) "in panem", Pagninus, Montanus, Piscator.
John Wesley
48:18 For food - For the maintenance of the city - officers.
48:1948:19: եւ գործաւորք քաղաքին գործեսցեն զնա ամենայն ցեղիցն Իսրայէլի[13105]։ [13105] Ոմանք. Զնա յամենայն ցեղիցն։
19 Իսրայէլի բոլոր ցեղերից քաղաքի գործաւորներն էլ կը մշակեն այն:
19 Եւ քաղաքին ծառայութիւնը ընողները Իսրայէլի բոլոր ցեղերէն պիտի ըլլան։
Եւ գործաւորք քաղաքին գործեսցեն զնա յամենայն ցեղիցն Իսրայելի:

48:19: եւ գործաւորք քաղաքին գործեսցեն զնա ամենայն ցեղիցն Իսրայէլի[13105]։
[13105] Ոմանք. Զնա յամենայն ցեղիցն։
19 Իսրայէլի բոլոր ցեղերից քաղաքի գործաւորներն էլ կը մշակեն այն:
19 Եւ քաղաքին ծառայութիւնը ընողները Իսրայէլի բոլոր ցեղերէն պիտի ըլլան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:1948:19 Работать же в городе могут работники из всех колен Израилевых.
48:19 οἱ ο the δὲ δε though; while ἐργαζόμενοι εργαζομαι work; perform τὴν ο the πόλιν πολις city ἐργῶνται εργαζομαι work; perform αὐτὴν αυτος he; him ἐκ εκ from; out of πασῶν πας all; every τῶν ο the φυλῶν φυλη tribe τοῦ ο the Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
48:19 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָ hā הַ the עֹבֵ֖ד ʕōvˌēḏ עבד work, serve הָ hā הַ the עִ֑יר ʕˈîr עִיר town יַעַבְד֕וּהוּ yaʕavᵊḏˈûhû עבד work, serve מִ mi מִן from כֹּ֖ל kkˌōl כֹּל whole שִׁבְטֵ֥י šivṭˌê שֵׁבֶט rod יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
48:19. servientes autem civitati operabuntur ex omnibus tribubus IsrahelAnd they that serve the city, shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel.
19. And they that labour in the city, out of all the tribes of Israel, shall till it.
48:19. And those who serve the city will be taken from all the tribes of Israel.
And they that serve the city shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel:

48:19 Работать же в городе могут работники из всех колен Израилевых.
48:19
οἱ ο the
δὲ δε though; while
ἐργαζόμενοι εργαζομαι work; perform
τὴν ο the
πόλιν πολις city
ἐργῶνται εργαζομαι work; perform
αὐτὴν αυτος he; him
ἐκ εκ from; out of
πασῶν πας all; every
τῶν ο the
φυλῶν φυλη tribe
τοῦ ο the
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
48:19
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָ hā הַ the
עֹבֵ֖ד ʕōvˌēḏ עבד work, serve
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֑יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
יַעַבְד֕וּהוּ yaʕavᵊḏˈûhû עבד work, serve
מִ mi מִן from
כֹּ֖ל kkˌōl כֹּל whole
שִׁבְטֵ֥י šivṭˌê שֵׁבֶט rod
יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
48:19. servientes autem civitati operabuntur ex omnibus tribubus Israhel
And they that serve the city, shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel.
19. And they that labour in the city, out of all the tribes of Israel, shall till it.
48:19. And those who serve the city will be taken from all the tribes of Israel.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
19. “Работать в городе” - См. объяснение 18: ст. ср. XLV:6. Следовательно, население города должно состоять из разных колен и он будет служить объединением их.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:19
Of old the city belonged to Benjamin and Judah, and its inhabitants were mainly from these tribes. Now all the tribes are to have equal part in it, and avoid jealousies (compare Sa2 19:43).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:19: shall serve: Eze 45:6; 1Kings 4:7-23; Neh. 11:1-36
John Gill
48:19 And they that serve the city shall serve it out of all the tribes of Israel. Whether they be civil magistrates, or ministers of the word, they shall be of Israel, and be Israelites indeed; and shall be taken out of the several tribes; some out of one tribe, and some out of another; all shall have the honour, as well as the labour, of serving the church and interest of Christ; yea, all true Israelites shall contribute as much as in them lies to the service of it.
48:2048:20: Եւ ամենայն պտուղ քսան եւ հինգ հազար՝ առ քսան եւ հինգ հազար. չորեքկուսի զատանիջիք զպտուղ սրբութեանն ՚ի բնակութենէ քաղաքին[13106]։ [13106] Ոմանք. Զպտուղ սրբութեանցն։
20 Եւ քաղաքի բնակելի վայրերից դուք, որպէս սրբավայրի ընծայ, կ’առանձնացնէք քառակուսի մի տարածութիւն՝ քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ քսանհինգ հազարի վրայ:
20 Բոլոր ընծան քսանըհինգ հազարով քսանըհինգ հազար քառակուսի ըլլալու է՝ սուրբ ընծայ քաղաքին կալուածին հետ։
Եւ ամենայն [1040]պտուղ քսան եւ հինգ հազար` առ քսան եւ հինգ հազար. չորեքկուսի [1041]զատանիջիք զպտուղ սրբութեանն ի բնակութենէ`` քաղաքին:

48:20: Եւ ամենայն պտուղ քսան եւ հինգ հազար՝ առ քսան եւ հինգ հազար. չորեքկուսի զատանիջիք զպտուղ սրբութեանն ՚ի բնակութենէ քաղաքին[13106]։
[13106] Ոմանք. Զպտուղ սրբութեանցն։
20 Եւ քաղաքի բնակելի վայրերից դուք, որպէս սրբավայրի ընծայ, կ’առանձնացնէք քառակուսի մի տարածութիւն՝ քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ քսանհինգ հազարի վրայ:
20 Բոլոր ընծան քսանըհինգ հազարով քսանըհինգ հազար քառակուսի ըլլալու է՝ սուրբ ընծայ քաղաքին կալուածին հետ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2048:20 Весь отделенный участок в двадцать пять тысяч длины и в двадцать пять тысяч ширины, четырехугольный, выделите в священный удел, со включением владений города;
48:20 πᾶσα πας all; every ἡ ο the ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand ἐπὶ επι in; on πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand τετράγωνον τετραγωνος four-cornered ἀφοριεῖτε αφοριζω separate αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him τὴν ο the ἀπαρχὴν απαρχη firstfruit τοῦ ο the ἁγίου αγιος holy ἀπὸ απο from; away τῆς ο the κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding τῆς ο the πόλεως πολις city
48:20 כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the תְּרוּמָ֗ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand בַּ ba בְּ in חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand רְבִיעִ֗ית rᵊvîʕˈîṯ רְבִיעִי fourth תָּרִ֨ימוּ֙ tārˈîmû רום be high אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֻזַּ֖ת ʔᵃḥuzzˌaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property הָ hā הַ the עִֽיר׃ ʕˈîr עִיר town
48:20. omnes primitiae viginti quinque milium per viginti quinque milia in quadrum separabuntur in primitias sanctuarii et possessionem civitatisAll the firstfruits, of five and twenty thousand, by five and twenty thousand foursquare, shall be set apart for the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and for the possession of the city.
20. All the oblation shall be five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand: ye shall offer the holy oblation foursquare, with the possession of the city.
48:20. All the first-fruits, of the twenty-five thousand by twenty-five thousand square, shall be separated as the first-fruits of the sanctuary and as the possession of the city.
All the oblation [shall be] five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand: ye shall offer the holy oblation foursquare, with the possession of the city:

48:20 Весь отделенный участок в двадцать пять тысяч длины и в двадцать пять тысяч ширины, четырехугольный, выделите в священный удел, со включением владений города;
48:20
πᾶσα πας all; every
ἡ ο the
ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
ἐπὶ επι in; on
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand
τετράγωνον τετραγωνος four-cornered
ἀφοριεῖτε αφοριζω separate
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
τὴν ο the
ἀπαρχὴν απαρχη firstfruit
τοῦ ο the
ἁγίου αγιος holy
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῆς ο the
κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding
τῆς ο the
πόλεως πολις city
48:20
כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole
הַ ha הַ the
תְּרוּמָ֗ה ttᵊrûmˈā תְּרוּמָה contribution
חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֔לֶף ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
בַּ ba בְּ in
חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand
רְבִיעִ֗ית rᵊvîʕˈîṯ רְבִיעִי fourth
תָּרִ֨ימוּ֙ tārˈîmû רום be high
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֻזַּ֖ת ʔᵃḥuzzˌaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property
הָ hā הַ the
עִֽיר׃ ʕˈîr עִיר town
48:20. omnes primitiae viginti quinque milium per viginti quinque milia in quadrum separabuntur in primitias sanctuarii et possessionem civitatis
All the firstfruits, of five and twenty thousand, by five and twenty thousand foursquare, shall be set apart for the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and for the possession of the city.
20. All the oblation shall be five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand: ye shall offer the holy oblation foursquare, with the possession of the city.
48:20. All the first-fruits, of the twenty-five thousand by twenty-five thousand square, shall be separated as the first-fruits of the sanctuary and as the possession of the city.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
20. Следовательно, и городской участок принадлежит к священному, к теруме (“весь отделенный участок” - кол - терума, LХХ: “весь начаток”). “Четырехугольный” - ревет в древнем языке, - четверть (город. участок действ. составлял 1/4: священного), а квадрат или квадраток - мерубат или равуа. - “Со включением” - евр. ел, к = ал, над, LXX: ???, “от”.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:20: The holy ... with ... - Or, "a fourth part as the holy oblation, for" etc.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:20: foursquare: Heb 12:17; Rev 21:16
Geneva 1599
48:20 All the oblation [shall be] five and twenty thousand by (d) five and twenty thousand: ye shall offer the holy oblation foursquare, with the possession of the city.
(d) Every way it will be five and twenty thousand.
John Gill
48:20 All the oblation shall be five and twenty thousand by five and twenty thousand,.... Or, "every oblation" (w); everyone of the oblations; that for the priests and the sanctuary; that for the Levites, and that for the city, its suburbs, and the maintenance of those that served the city; each were a square of five and twenty thousand reeds:
ye shall offer the holy oblation foursquare, with the possession of the city; taking in the possession of the city, or what that possessed, the oblation of land for that, and its suburbs, and for produce to support those that served it, should be a foursquare of the above dimensions.
(w) "omnis oblatio", Pagninus, Montanus.
John Wesley
48:20 The possession - The land assigned for the city.
48:2148:21: Եւ աւելորդ նորուն՝ գլխաւորի՛ն եղիցի. եւ անտի ՚ի պտուղ սրբութեան, եւ ՚ի նիստ քաղաքին յանդիման նորին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն՝ մինչեւ ՚ի սահմանս արեւելից կողմանն. եւ ՚ի ծովակողմ դէմ յանդիման նմին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար մինչեւ ՚ի սահմանս ծովակողմանն մե՛րձ առ վիճակ գլխաւորին։ Եւ եղիցի պտուղ սրբութեանցն, եւ սրբութիւն տաճարին ՚ի մէջ նորա[13107]. [13107] Բազումք. Եւ աւելորդն նորին։ Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ ՚ի ծովակողմն դէմ յանդիման նմին։
21 Դրանից աւելացածն էլ իշխանինը կը լինի: Նոյն տեղից, իբրեւ ընծայ սրբատեղիին, քաղաքավայրում, նրա դիմաց, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին կը լինի մինչեւ արեւելեան կողմի սահմանները. իսկ դրա դիմաց, արեւմտեան կողմը, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին էլ կը լինի իշխանի բաժնին մօտ: Եւ դա ընծայ կը լինի սրբատեղիներին. տաճարի սրբարանը կը լինի նրա մէջտեղում,
21 «Սուրբ ընծային ու քաղաքին կալուածին մէկ կողմէն ու միւս կողմէն մնացածը իշխանին պիտի ըլլայ։ Նուիրուած քսանըհինգ հազարին դէմ մինչեւ արեւելեան սահմանը ու դէպի արեւմուտք քսանըհինգ հազարին դէմ մինչեւ արեւմտեան սահմանը ցեղերուն բաժիններուն քով իշխանին պիտի ըլլայ։ Ասիկա պիտի ըլլայ սուրբ ընծան ու տաճարին սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ աւելորդն [1042]նորին` գլխաւորին եղիցի. եւ անտի ի պտուղ սրբութեանն, եւ ի նիստ քաղաքին յանդիման նորին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն`` մինչեւ ի սահմանս արեւելից կողմանն, եւ ի ծովակողմ դէմ յանդիման [1043]նմին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար`` մինչեւ ի սահմանս ծովակողմանն մերձ [1044]առ վիճակ գլխաւորին: Եւ եղիցի պտուղ`` սրբութեանցն եւ սրբութիւն տաճարին ի մէջ նորա:

48:21: Եւ աւելորդ նորուն՝ գլխաւորի՛ն եղիցի. եւ անտի ՚ի պտուղ սրբութեան, եւ ՚ի նիստ քաղաքին յանդիման նորին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար յերկայնութիւն՝ մինչեւ ՚ի սահմանս արեւելից կողմանն. եւ ՚ի ծովակողմ դէմ յանդիման նմին, քսան եւ հինգ հազար մինչեւ ՚ի սահմանս ծովակողմանն մե՛րձ առ վիճակ գլխաւորին։ Եւ եղիցի պտուղ սրբութեանցն, եւ սրբութիւն տաճարին ՚ի մէջ նորա[13107].
[13107] Բազումք. Եւ աւելորդն նորին։ Առ Ոսկանայ պակասի. Եւ ՚ի ծովակողմն դէմ յանդիման նմին։
21 Դրանից աւելացածն էլ իշխանինը կը լինի: Նոյն տեղից, իբրեւ ընծայ սրբատեղիին, քաղաքավայրում, նրա դիմաց, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին կը լինի մինչեւ արեւելեան կողմի սահմանները. իսկ դրա դիմաց, արեւմտեան կողմը, քսանհինգ հազար ձողաչափ երկարութեամբ մի բաժին էլ կը լինի իշխանի բաժնին մօտ: Եւ դա ընծայ կը լինի սրբատեղիներին. տաճարի սրբարանը կը լինի նրա մէջտեղում,
21 «Սուրբ ընծային ու քաղաքին կալուածին մէկ կողմէն ու միւս կողմէն մնացածը իշխանին պիտի ըլլայ։ Նուիրուած քսանըհինգ հազարին դէմ մինչեւ արեւելեան սահմանը ու դէպի արեւմուտք քսանըհինգ հազարին դէմ մինչեւ արեւմտեան սահմանը ցեղերուն բաժիններուն քով իշխանին պիտի ըլլայ։ Ասիկա պիտի ըլլայ սուրբ ընծան ու տաճարին սրբարանը անոր մէջտեղը պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2148:21 а остальное князю. Как со стороны священного участка, так и со стороны владений города, против двадцати пяти тысяч {тростей} до восточной границы участка, и на запад против двадцати пяти тысяч у западной границы соразмерно с сими уделами, удел князю, так что священный участок и святилище будет в средине его.
48:21 τὸ ο the δὲ δε though; while περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous τῷ ο the ἀφηγουμένῳ αφηγεομαι from; out of τούτου ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even ἐκ εκ from; out of τούτου ουτος this; he ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit τοῦ ο the ἁγίου αγιος holy καὶ και and; even εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the κατάσχεσιν κατασχεσις holding τῆς ο the πόλεως πολις city ἐπὶ επι in; on πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand μῆκος μηκος length ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east καὶ και and; even πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea ἐπὶ επι in; on πέντε πεντε five καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea ἐχόμενα εχω have; hold τῶν ο the μερίδων μερις portion τοῦ ο the ἀφηγουμένου αφηγεομαι and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἡ ο the ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the ἁγίασμα αγιασμα the οἴκου οικος home; household ἐν εν in μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
48:21 וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the נֹּותָ֣ר nnôṯˈār יתר remain לַ la לְ to † הַ the נָּשִׂ֣יא nnāśˈî נָשִׂיא chief מִ mi מִן from זֶּ֣ה׀ zzˈeh זֶה this וּ û וְ and מִ mi מִן from זֶּ֣ה׀ zzˈeh זֶה this לִ li לְ to תְרֽוּמַת־ ṯᵊrˈûmaṯ- תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֣דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness וְ wᵊ וְ and לַ la לְ to אֲחֻזַּ֪ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property הָ hā הַ the עִ֟יר ʕˈîr עִיר town אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to פְּנֵ֣י pᵊnˈê פָּנֶה face חֲמִשָּׁה֩ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֥לֶף׀ ʔˌelef אֶלֶף thousand תְּרוּמָה֮ tᵊrûmā תְּרוּמָה contribution עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary קָדִימָה֒ qāḏîmˌā קָדִים east וְ wᵊ וְ and יָ֗מָּה yˈommā יָם sea עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon פְּ֠נֵי pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֥ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty אֶ֨לֶף֙ ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea לְ lᵊ לְ to עֻמַּ֥ת ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side חֲלָקִ֖ים ḥᵃlāqˌîm חֵלֶק share לַ la לְ to † הַ the נָּשִׂ֑יא nnāśˈî נָשִׂיא chief וְ wᵊ וְ and הָֽיְתָה֙ hˈāyᵊṯā היה be תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness וּ û וְ and מִקְדַּ֥שׁ miqdˌaš מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary הַ ha הַ the בַּ֖יִת bbˌayiṯ בַּיִת house בְּב *bᵊ בְּ in תֹוכֹֽותוכה *ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:21. quod autem reliquum fuerit principis erit ex omni parte primitiarum sanctuarii et possessionis civitatis e regione viginti quinque milium primitiarum usque ad terminum orientalem sed et ad mare e regione viginti quinque milium usque ad terminum maris similiter in partibus principis erit et erunt primitiae sanctuarii et sanctuarium templi in medio eiusAnd the residue shall be for the prince on every side of the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and of the possession of the city over against the five and twenty thousand of the firstfruits unto the east border: toward the sea also over against the five and twenty thousand, unto the border of the sea, shall likewise be the portion of the prince: and the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and the sanctuary of the temple shall be in the midst thereof.
21. And the residue shall be for the prince, on the one side and on the other of the holy oblation and of the possession of the city, in front of the five and twenty thousand of the oblation toward the east border, and westward in front of the five and twenty thousand toward the west border, answerable unto the portions, it shall be for the prince: and the holy oblation and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst thereof.
48:21. And what will remain shall be for the prince out of every portion of the first-fruits of the sanctuary and of the possession of the city, from the region of the twenty-five thousand of the first-fruits, even to the eastern border. But also to the sea from the region of the twenty-five thousand, even to the border of the sea, similarly shall be the portion of the prince. And the first-fruits of the sanctuary, and the sanctuary of the temple, shall be in its center.
And the residue [shall be] for the prince, on the one side and on the other of the holy oblation, and of the possession of the city, over against the five and twenty thousand of the oblation toward the east border, and westward over against the five and twenty thousand toward the west border, over against the portions for the prince: and it shall be the holy oblation; and the sanctuary of the house [shall be] in the midst thereof:

48:21 а остальное князю. Как со стороны священного участка, так и со стороны владений города, против двадцати пяти тысяч {тростей} до восточной границы участка, и на запад против двадцати пяти тысяч у западной границы соразмерно с сими уделами, удел князю, так что священный участок и святилище будет в средине его.
48:21
τὸ ο the
δὲ δε though; while
περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous
τῷ ο the
ἀφηγουμένῳ αφηγεομαι from; out of
τούτου ουτος this; he
καὶ και and; even
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τούτου ουτος this; he
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ἀπαρχῶν απαρχη firstfruit
τοῦ ο the
ἁγίου αγιος holy
καὶ και and; even
εἰς εις into; for
τὴν ο the
κατάσχεσιν κατασχεσις holding
τῆς ο the
πόλεως πολις city
ἐπὶ επι in; on
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand
μῆκος μηκος length
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
καὶ και and; even
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
ἐπὶ επι in; on
πέντε πεντε five
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
χιλιάδας χιλιας thousand
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
ἐχόμενα εχω have; hold
τῶν ο the
μερίδων μερις portion
τοῦ ο the
ἀφηγουμένου αφηγεομαι and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἡ ο the
ἀπαρχὴ απαρχη firstfruit
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
ἁγίασμα αγιασμα the
οἴκου οικος home; household
ἐν εν in
μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle
αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
48:21
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הַ ha הַ the
נֹּותָ֣ר nnôṯˈār יתר remain
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
נָּשִׂ֣יא nnāśˈî נָשִׂיא chief
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּ֣ה׀ zzˈeh זֶה this
וּ û וְ and
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּ֣ה׀ zzˈeh זֶה this
לִ li לְ to
תְרֽוּמַת־ ṯᵊrˈûmaṯ- תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֣דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
וְ wᵊ וְ and
לַ la לְ to
אֲחֻזַּ֪ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֟יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
פְּנֵ֣י pᵊnˈê פָּנֶה face
חֲמִשָּׁה֩ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֥לֶף׀ ʔˌelef אֶלֶף thousand
תְּרוּמָה֮ tᵊrûmā תְּרוּמָה contribution
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
קָדִימָה֒ qāḏîmˌā קָדִים east
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָ֗מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
פְּ֠נֵי pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face
חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִ֥ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
אֶ֨לֶף֙ ʔˈelef אֶלֶף thousand
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
יָ֔מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֻמַּ֥ת ʕummˌaṯ עֻמָּה side
חֲלָקִ֖ים ḥᵃlāqˌîm חֵלֶק share
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
נָּשִׂ֑יא nnāśˈî נָשִׂיא chief
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָֽיְתָה֙ hˈāyᵊṯā היה be
תְּרוּמַ֣ת tᵊrûmˈaṯ תְּרוּמָה contribution
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
וּ û וְ and
מִקְדַּ֥שׁ miqdˌaš מִקְדָּשׁ sanctuary
הַ ha הַ the
בַּ֖יִת bbˌayiṯ בַּיִת house
בְּב
*bᵊ בְּ in
תֹוכֹֽותוכה
*ṯôḵˈô תָּוֶךְ midst
48:21. quod autem reliquum fuerit principis erit ex omni parte primitiarum sanctuarii et possessionis civitatis e regione viginti quinque milium primitiarum usque ad terminum orientalem sed et ad mare e regione viginti quinque milium usque ad terminum maris similiter in partibus principis erit et erunt primitiae sanctuarii et sanctuarium templi in medio eius
And the residue shall be for the prince on every side of the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and of the possession of the city over against the five and twenty thousand of the firstfruits unto the east border: toward the sea also over against the five and twenty thousand, unto the border of the sea, shall likewise be the portion of the prince: and the firstfruits of the sanctuary, and the sanctuary of the temple shall be in the midst thereof.
21. And the residue shall be for the prince, on the one side and on the other of the holy oblation and of the possession of the city, in front of the five and twenty thousand of the oblation toward the east border, and westward in front of the five and twenty thousand toward the west border, answerable unto the portions, it shall be for the prince: and the holy oblation and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst thereof.
48:21. And what will remain shall be for the prince out of every portion of the first-fruits of the sanctuary and of the possession of the city, from the region of the twenty-five thousand of the first-fruits, even to the eastern border. But also to the sea from the region of the twenty-five thousand, even to the border of the sea, similarly shall be the portion of the prince. And the first-fruits of the sanctuary, and the sanctuary of the temple, shall be in its center.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
21. “Как со стороны священного участка, так и со стороны владений города”. LXX точнее: “от сего и от оного (миззе умиззе, - с той и другой стороны) от начатков святаго и (подразум. “от яже”) во участие (удел) града”. - “До восточной границы участка, и на запад…” LXX: “до предел, иже к морю и к востоком”. - “У западной границы”, букв “до границы к морю”, т. е. Средиземному. - “Соразмерно с сими уделами, удел князю”. LXX: “близ (ecomena) частей старейшины”, т. е. священный участок с в. и з. соприкасается с княжеским участком, собственно двумя участками его. - “Святилище” - букв. “святилище дома” = Лев,. XVI:33, LXX: “освящение храма”. Ср. XLV:7.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:21: And the residue - for the prince - His portion was alongside that of the Levites, from west to east; these were on each side twenty-five thousand cubits in length, from the east to the west. by twelve thousand five hundred cubits in breadth from north to south. The space both above and below was equal, between the tribe of Judah and that of Benjamin to north and south; and the portion of the Levites, which had Judah and Benjamin to the north and south, and the portion of the prince to the east and to the west. See the map.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:21: Or, "And the residue shall be for the prince - on the one side and on the other side of the holy oblation and of the possession of the city over against the 25, 000 of the oblation toward the east border, and westward over against the 25, 000 toward the west border, over against the portions (of Judah and Benjamin, between which the oblation was included), shall be "for the prince; and it shall be that the holy oblation and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst thereof." This exactly describes the position of the prince's allotments on the borders of the "oblations."
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:21: the residue: Eze 48:22, Eze 34:23, Eze 34:24, Eze 37:24, Eze 45:7, Eze 45:8; Hos 1:11
and westward: Eze 48:8-10
John Gill
48:21 And the residue shall be for the prince,.... Not the civil magistrate, but the Prince Messiah; the King, Governor, and Protector of his church and people:
on the one side and on the other of the holy oblation, and of the possession of the city: his portion shall lie on each side of the portion for the sanctuary, the priests and Levites, and for the city and its appurtenances; so that he will be the guardian and preserver of them all; See Gill on Ezek 45:7,
over against the five and twenty thousand of the oblation toward the east border, and westward over against the five and twenty thousand toward the west border; or, "before the face" (x) "of the five and twenty thousand of the oblation", &c.; that is, next to the tribe of Judah, close by that, and just before the holy oblation of five and twenty thousand reeds, both eastward and westward, should be the portion of the prince on one side:
over against the portions for the prince; or, "over against" these shall be that
for the prince (y); parallel with the portions of the several tribes before described shall be that of the prince, which belongs to him:
and it shall be the holy oblation; and the sanctuary of the house shall be in the midst thereof; that is, the holy oblation of the land for the priests and Levites, and the sanctuary should be between that part of the prince's portion which lay next to Judah, and that which lay next to Benjamin; of which in the next verse.
(x) "ante facies", Pagninus; "ante faciem", Starckius. (y) "ex adverso portionum, id vero principis erit", Tigurine version; "juxta portiones, principi erit", Cocceius, Starckius.
48:2248:22: եւ ժառանգութիւն Ղեւտացւոցն։ Եւ ՚ի բնակութենէ քաղաքին, միջոցն գլխաւորացն եղիցի. եւ ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Յուդայ. եւ ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Բենիամինի՝ գլխաւորին եղիցի[13108]։ [13108] Ոմանք. Եւ ՚ի ժառանգութիւն. Ղեւտ՛՛... եղիցի. ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Յու՛՛։
22 որպէս ղեւտացիների ժառանգութիւն: Քաղաքի բնակատեղիից մի տարածութիւն իշխաններինը կը լինի. Յուդայի երկրի սահմանների ու Բենիամինի երկրի սահմանների միջեւ բաժին կը յատկացուի իշխանին»:
22 Իշխանին բաժինին մէջտեղը եղող Ղեւտացիներուն կալուածէն ու քաղաքին կալուածէն դուրս՝ Յուդայի սահմանին ու Բենիամինի սահմանին մէջտեղը իշխանինը պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ [1045]ի ժառանգութենէ Ղեւտացւոցն, եւ ի բնակութենէ քաղաքին` միջոցն գլխաւորացն եղիցի. եւ`` ի մէջ սահմանացն Յուդայ, եւ ի մէջ սահմանացն Բենիամինի` [1046]գլխաւորին եղիցի:

48:22: եւ ժառանգութիւն Ղեւտացւոցն։ Եւ ՚ի բնակութենէ քաղաքին, միջոցն գլխաւորացն եղիցի. եւ ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Յուդայ. եւ ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Բենիամինի՝ գլխաւորին եղիցի[13108]։
[13108] Ոմանք. Եւ ՚ի ժառանգութիւն. Ղեւտ՛՛... եղիցի. ՚ի մէջ սահմանացն Յու՛՛։
22 որպէս ղեւտացիների ժառանգութիւն: Քաղաքի բնակատեղիից մի տարածութիւն իշխաններինը կը լինի. Յուդայի երկրի սահմանների ու Բենիամինի երկրի սահմանների միջեւ բաժին կը յատկացուի իշխանին»:
22 Իշխանին բաժինին մէջտեղը եղող Ղեւտացիներուն կալուածէն ու քաղաքին կալուածէն դուրս՝ Յուդայի սահմանին ու Բենիամինի սահմանին մէջտեղը իշխանինը պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2248:22 И то, что от владений левитских {и} от владений города остается в промежутке, принадлежит также князю; промежуток между границею Иуды и между границею Вениамина будет принадлежать князю.
48:22 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῆς ο the κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding τῶν ο the Λευιτῶν λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῆς ο the κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding τῆς ο the πόλεως πολις city ἐν εν in μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle τῶν ο the ἀφηγουμένων αφηγεομαι be ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha καὶ και and; even ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin τῶν ο the ἀφηγουμένων αφηγεομαι be
48:22 וּ û וְ and מֵ mē מִן from אֲחֻזַּ֤ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּם֙ lᵊwiyyˌim לֵוִי Levite וּ û וְ and מֵ mē מִן from אֲחֻזַּ֣ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property הָ hā הַ the עִ֔יר ʕˈîr עִיר town בְּ bᵊ בְּ in תֹ֛וךְ ṯˈôḵ תָּוֶךְ midst אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] לַ la לְ to † הַ the נָּשִׂ֖יא nnāśˌî נָשִׂיא chief יִֽהְיֶ֑ה yˈihyˈeh היה be בֵּ֣ין׀ bˈên בַּיִן interval גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary יְהוּדָ֗ה yᵊhûḏˈā יְהוּדָה Judah וּ û וְ and בֵין֙ vên בַּיִן interval גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary בִּנְיָמִ֔ן binyāmˈin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin לַ la לְ to † הַ the נָּשִׂ֖יא nnāśˌî נָשִׂיא chief יִהְיֶֽה׃ yihyˈeh היה be
48:22. de possessione autem Levitarum et de possessione civitatis in medio partium principis erit inter terminum Iuda et inter terminum Beniamin et ad principem pertinebitAnd from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city which are in the midst of the prince's portions: what shall be to the border of Juda, and to the border of Benjamin, shall also belong to the prince.
22. Moreover from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, being in the midst of that which is the prince’s, between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince.
48:22. Now from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, which are in the midst of the prince’s portions, whatever is between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall also belong to the prince.
Moreover from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, [being] in the midst [of that] which is the prince' s, between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince:

48:22 И то, что от владений левитских {и} от владений города остается в промежутке, принадлежит также князю; промежуток между границею Иуды и между границею Вениамина будет принадлежать князю.
48:22
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῆς ο the
κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding
τῶν ο the
Λευιτῶν λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῆς ο the
κατασχέσεως κατασχεσις holding
τῆς ο the
πόλεως πολις city
ἐν εν in
μέσῳ μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τῶν ο the
ἀφηγουμένων αφηγεομαι be
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha
καὶ και and; even
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin
τῶν ο the
ἀφηγουμένων αφηγεομαι be
48:22
וּ û וְ and
מֵ mē מִן from
אֲחֻזַּ֤ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property
הַ ha הַ the
לְוִיִּם֙ lᵊwiyyˌim לֵוִי Levite
וּ û וְ and
מֵ mē מִן from
אֲחֻזַּ֣ת ʔᵃḥuzzˈaṯ אֲחֻזָּה land property
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֔יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
תֹ֛וךְ ṯˈôḵ תָּוֶךְ midst
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
נָּשִׂ֖יא nnāśˌî נָשִׂיא chief
יִֽהְיֶ֑ה yˈihyˈeh היה be
בֵּ֣ין׀ bˈên בַּיִן interval
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
יְהוּדָ֗ה yᵊhûḏˈā יְהוּדָה Judah
וּ û וְ and
בֵין֙ vên בַּיִן interval
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
בִּנְיָמִ֔ן binyāmˈin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin
לַ la לְ to
† הַ the
נָּשִׂ֖יא nnāśˌî נָשִׂיא chief
יִהְיֶֽה׃ yihyˈeh היה be
48:22. de possessione autem Levitarum et de possessione civitatis in medio partium principis erit inter terminum Iuda et inter terminum Beniamin et ad principem pertinebit
And from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city which are in the midst of the prince's portions: what shall be to the border of Juda, and to the border of Benjamin, shall also belong to the prince.
22. Moreover from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, being in the midst of that which is the prince’s, between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince.
48:22. Now from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, which are in the midst of the prince’s portions, whatever is between the border of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall also belong to the prince.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ gnv▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
22. “И то, что от владений левитских и от владений города остается в промежутке”, букв. “и от владений левитов и от владений города в середине” (так и у LXX) может относиться и к предыдущему: священнический участок и храм лежит среди владений левитских и города. - “Принадлежит также князю”. У LXX: “старейшин” - мн. ч., так как имеется в виду преемственный ряд князей.
Geneva 1599
48:22 Moreover from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city, [being] in the midst [of that] which is the prince's, between the border (e) of Judah and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince.
(e) So that Judah was on the north side of the princes and Levites portions and Benjamin on the south side.
John Gill
48:22 Moreover, from the possession of the Levites, and from the possession of the city,.... Or, "beyond" these, as it may be rendered, on the other side of them; or, "except" (z) these:
being in the midst of that which is the prince's; between his two portions; or, as it is next explained,
between the border of Judah, and the border of Benjamin, shall be for the prince; that is, all beyond and excepting that which belonged to the priests and Levites, the sanctuary and the city, were the prince's, which lay between Judah and Benjamin: or thus it was; before the holy oblation one part of the prince's portion ran, parallel with the tribe of Judah, east and west; after the holy oblation on the other side, another part of his portion touched the tribe of Benjamin, and ran parallel with the east and west: and so were between them both, as well as on each side of the holy oblation: all this denotes the nearness of Christ to his church and people; his protection of them on all sides; and the largeness of his interest and kingdom; see Ezek 45:7.
(z)
48:2348:23: Եւ աւելորդ ցեղիցն՝ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմ Բենիամինի բաժին մի։
23 «Ինչ վերաբերում է մնացած ցեղերին, ապա արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Բենիամինի ցեղին:
23 «Մնացած ցեղերուն՝ արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Բենիամինին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ աւելորդ ցեղիցն` ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմ` Բենիամինի բաժին մի:

48:23: Եւ աւելորդ ցեղիցն՝ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ցծովակողմ Բենիամինի բաժին մի։
23 «Ինչ վերաբերում է մնացած ցեղերին, ապա արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Բենիամինի ցեղին:
23 «Մնացած ցեղերուն՝ արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը, Բենիամինին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2348:23 Остальное же от колен, от восточного края до западного один удел Вениамину.
48:23 καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous τῶν ο the φυλῶν φυλη tribe ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin μία εις.1 one; unit
48:23 וְ wᵊ וְ and יֶ֖תֶר yˌeṯer יֶתֶר remainder הַ ha הַ the שְּׁבָטִ֑ים ššᵊvāṭˈîm שֵׁבֶט rod מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea בִּנְיָמִ֥ן binyāmˌin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:23. et reliquis tribubus a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Beniamin unaAnd for the rest of the tribes: from the east side to the west side, one portion for Benjamin.
23. And as for the rest of the tribes: from the east side unto the west side; Benjamin, one .
48:23. And for the remainder of the tribes, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Benjamin.
As for the rest of the tribes, from the east side unto the west side, Benjamin [shall have] a:

48:23 Остальное же от колен, от восточного края до западного один удел Вениамину.
48:23
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
περισσὸν περισσος overflowing; superfluous
τῶν ο the
φυλῶν φυλη tribe
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:23
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יֶ֖תֶר yˌeṯer יֶתֶר remainder
הַ ha הַ the
שְּׁבָטִ֑ים ššᵊvāṭˈîm שֵׁבֶט rod
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
בִּנְיָמִ֥ן binyāmˌin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:23. et reliquis tribubus a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Beniamin una
And for the rest of the tribes: from the east side to the west side, one portion for Benjamin.
23. And as for the rest of the tribes: from the east side unto the west side; Benjamin, one .
48:23. And for the remainder of the tribes, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Benjamin.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
23-27. Владение остальных (йетер, perisson, избыточное) 5: колен. В евр. и греч. образ выражения во всех стихах одинаков, а слав. разнообразит: 23: ст. “от сущих к востоком даже до сущих к морю”, = греч.; 24: ст.: “к востоком даже до страны яже к морю”; 25: ст. “от страны яже на восток даже до страны яже к морю”; 26: ст.: “от востоков даже до моря”; 27: ст.: “от востока даже до страны моря”. См. объяснение 1: ст. Основание распределения - см. предв. зам.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:23: Benjamin: Eze 48:1-7; Gen 35:16-19; Jos 18:21-28
a portion: Heb. one portion, Eze 48:1
John Gill
48:23 As for the rest of the tribes,.... Not yet mentioned, which lay to the south of the sanctuary, and are as follow:
from the east side to the west side, Benjamin shall have a portion;
the sons of God's right hand, who are as near and dear to him as a man's right hand is to him. Judah and Benjamin are nearest to the holy oblation, sanctuary, city, and prince; the one to the north of them, the other to the south; these tribes being faithful to God, and with his saints, when others departed from him; the Lord takes great notice of his faithful ones, and honours them, Hos 11:12.
48:2448:24: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Բենիամինի՝ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Շմաւոնի բաժին մի[13109]։ [13109] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն Շմա՛՛։
24 Բենիամինի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Շմաւոնի ցեղին:
24 Ու Բենիամինի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Շմաւոնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Բենիամինի` ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Շմաւոնի բաժին մի:

48:24: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Բենիամինի՝ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Շմաւոնի բաժին մի[13109]։
[13109] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն Շմա՛՛։
24 Բենիամինի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Շմաւոնի ցեղին:
24 Ու Բենիամինի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Շմաւոնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2448:24 Подле границы Вениамина, от восточного края до западного один удел Симеону.
48:24 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon μία εις.1 one; unit
48:24 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary בִּנְיָמִ֗ן binyāmˈin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea שִׁמְעֹ֥ון šimʕˌôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:24. et contra terminum Beniamin a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Symeon unaAnd over against the border of Benjamin, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Simeon.
24. And by the border of Benjamin, from the east side unto the west side; Simeon, one .
48:24. And opposite the border of Benjamin, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Simeon.
And by the border of Benjamin, from the east side unto the west side, Simeon [shall have] a:

48:24 Подле границы Вениамина, от восточного края до западного один удел Симеону.
48:24
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:24
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
בִּנְיָמִ֗ן binyāmˈin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
שִׁמְעֹ֥ון šimʕˌôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:24. et contra terminum Beniamin a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Symeon una
And over against the border of Benjamin, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Simeon.
24. And by the border of Benjamin, from the east side unto the west side; Simeon, one .
48:24. And opposite the border of Benjamin, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Simeon.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:24: Simeon: Gen 29:33, Gen 49:5-7; Jos 19:1-9
John Gill
48:24 And by the border of Benjamin, from the east side unto the west side, Simeon shall have a portion. Close by the border of Benjamin, running east and west, Simeon's part and inheritance in the land shall be; even such true Israelites as "hear", understand, and believe the Gospel, and practise what they hear. This tribe is not now to be divided and scattered in Israel, or to have its inheritance in Judah, as formerly, Gen 49:5, but to be distinct, and have a portion by itself.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:24 Benjamin--Compare Jacob's prophecy (Gen 49:27; Deut 33:12). It alone with Judah had been throughout loyal to the house of David, so its prowess at the "night" of the national history was celebrated as well as in the "morning."
48:2548:25: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Շմաւոնի ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Իսաքարայ բաժին մի։
25 Շմաւոնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Իսաքարի ցեղին:
25 Եւ Շմաւոնի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Իսաքարին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Շմաւոնի ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Իսաքարայ բաժին մի:

48:25: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Շմաւոնի ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Իսաքարայ բաժին մի։
25 Շմաւոնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Իսաքարի ցեղին:
25 Եւ Շմաւոնի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Իսաքարին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2548:25 Подле границы Симеона, от восточного края до западного один удел Иссахару.
48:25 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar μία εις.1 one; unit
48:25 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary שִׁמְעֹ֗ון šimʕˈôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea יִשָׂשכָ֥ר yiśāŝḵˌār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:25. et super terminum Symeonis a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentis Isachar unaAnd by the border of Simeon, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Issachar.
25. And by the border of Simeon, from the east side unto the west side; Issachar, one .
48:25. And beyond the border of Simeon, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Issachar.
And by the border of Simeon, from the east side unto the west side, Issachar a:

48:25 Подле границы Симеона, от восточного края до западного один удел Иссахару.
48:25
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:25
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
שִׁמְעֹ֗ון šimʕˈôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
יִשָׂשכָ֥ר yiśāŝḵˌār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:25. et super terminum Symeonis a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentis Isachar una
And by the border of Simeon, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Issachar.
25. And by the border of Simeon, from the east side unto the west side; Issachar, one .
48:25. And beyond the border of Simeon, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Issachar.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:25: Issachar: Gen 30:14-18; Jos 19:17-23
John Gill
48:25 And by the border of Simeon, from the east side unto the west side, Issachar a portion. Next, closely adjoining to Simeon's inheritance, and in the same direction, shall be Issachar's; such Christians as shall have the "rewards" of grace for their services and sufferings in times of tribulation.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:25 Simeon--omitted in the blessing of Moses in Deu. 33:1-29 perhaps because of the Simeonite "prince," who at Baal-peor led the Israelites in their idolatrous whoredoms with Midian (Num 25:14).
48:2648:26: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Իսաքարայ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Զաբուղոնի բաժին մի[13110]։ [13110] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։
26 Իսաքարի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Զաբուղոնի ցեղին:
26 Ու Իսաքարի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Զաբուղոնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Իսաքարայ` ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Զաբուղոնի բաժին մի:

48:26: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Իսաքարայ ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Զաբուղոնի բաժին մի[13110]։
[13110] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։
26 Իսաքարի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Զաբուղոնի ցեղին:
26 Ու Իսաքարի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Զաբուղոնին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2648:26 Подле границы Иссахара, от восточного края до западного один удел Завулону.
48:26 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon μία εις.1 one; unit
48:26 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary יִשָׂשכָ֗ר yiśāŝḵˈār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea זְבוּלֻ֥ן zᵊvûlˌun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:26. et super terminum Isachar a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Zabulon unaAnd by the border of Issachar, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Zabulon.
26. And by the border of Issachar, from the east side unto the west side; Zebulun, one .
48:26. And beyond the border of Issachar, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Zebulun.
And by the border of Issachar, from the east side unto the west side, Zebulun a:

48:26 Подле границы Иссахара, от восточного края до западного один удел Завулону.
48:26
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:26
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
יִשָׂשכָ֗ר yiśāŝḵˈār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
זְבוּלֻ֥ן zᵊvûlˌun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:26. et super terminum Isachar a plaga orientali usque ad plagam occidentalem Zabulon una
And by the border of Issachar, from the east side to the west side, one portion for Zabulon.
26. And by the border of Issachar, from the east side unto the west side; Zebulun, one .
48:26. And beyond the border of Issachar, from the eastern region, even to the western region, there shall be one portion for Zebulun.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:26: Zebulun: Gen 30:19, Gen 30:20; Jos 19:10-16
John Gill
48:26 And by the border of Issachar, from the east side unto the west side, Zebulun a portion. In like manner, next to Issachar's inheritance, and bordering on it, shall be Zebulun's; who shall be no more a haven for ships, having a different situation and allotment; and may describe such Christians as dwell in Christ, and he in them.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:26 Issachar--Its ancient portion had been on the plain of Esdraelon. Compared (Gen 49:14) to "a strong ass crouching between two burdens," that is, tribute and tillage; never meddling with wars except in self-defense.
48:2748:27: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Զաբուղոնի ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Գադայ բաժին մի[13111]։ [13111] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։
27 Զաբուղոնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Գադի ցեղին:
27 Եւ Զաբուղոնի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Գադին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Զաբուղոնի ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ի ծովակողմ` Գադայ բաժին մի:

48:27: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Զաբուղոնի ՚ի կողմանցն արեւելից մինչեւ ՚ի ծովակողմ Գադայ բաժին մի[13111]։
[13111] Ոմանք. Մինչեւ ցծովակողմն։
27 Զաբուղոնի սահմաններից, արեւելեան կողմերից մինչեւ արեւմուտք՝ մէկ բաժին կը լինի Գադի ցեղին:
27 Եւ Զաբուղոնի սահմանին քով արեւելեան կողմէն մինչեւ արեւմտեան կողմը Գադին մէկ բաժին ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2748:27 Подле границы Завулона, от восточного края до западного один удел Гаду.
48:27 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath μία εις.1 one; unit
48:27 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary זְבוּלֻ֗ן zᵊvûlˈun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea גָּ֥ד gˌāḏ גָּד Gad אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:27. et super terminum Zabulon a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Gad unaAnd by the border of Zabulon, from the east side to the side of the sea, one portion for Gad.
27. And by the border of Zebulun, from the east side unto the west side; Gad, one .
48:27. And beyond the border of Zebulun, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Gad.
And by the border of Zebulun, from the east side unto the west side, Gad a:

48:27 Подле границы Завулона, от восточного края до западного один удел Гаду.
48:27
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:27
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַ֣ל׀ ʕˈal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
זְבוּלֻ֗ן zᵊvûlˈun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֥ת ppᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֛מָה qāḏˈimā קָדִים east
עַד־ ʕaḏ- עַד unto
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֖מָּה yˌommā יָם sea
גָּ֥ד gˌāḏ גָּד Gad
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:27. et super terminum Zabulon a plaga orientali usque ad plagam maris Gad una
And by the border of Zabulon, from the east side to the side of the sea, one portion for Gad.
27. And by the border of Zebulun, from the east side unto the west side; Gad, one .
48:27. And beyond the border of Zebulun, from the eastern region, even to the region of the sea, there shall be one portion for Gad.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:27: Gad: Gen 30:10, Gen 30:11; Jos 13:24-28
John Gill
48:27 And by the border of Zebulun, from the east side unto the west side, Gad a portion. The last of the tribes; a "troop" of overcomers, who are more than conquerors over all their enemies through Christ: all Christians shall have their part and portion in the church below, and in all the privileges and immunities of it; and in the church above, in all the glories and blessedness thereof.
48:2848:28: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Գադայ մինչեւ ցհարա՛ւ եղիցի սահմանք նորա՝ ՚ի Թեմանայ եւ ՚ի ջրոցն Ռաբովթկադէս՝ ժառանգութիւն մի մինչեւ ցծովն մեծ[13112]։ [13112] Ոմանք. Եւ եղիցին սահմանք նորա... եւ ՚ի ջրոյն Ռաբովթ Կադէս։
28 Գադի սահմաններից մինչեւ հարաւ, Թեմանից ու Ռաբոթ Կադէսի ջրերից մինչեւ Մեծ ծովը կը լինի մէկ ժառանգութեան սահման:
28 Ու Գադի սահմանին քով հարաւային կողմը դէպի հարաւ երկրին սահմանը, Թամարէն մինչեւ Վիճաբանութեան ջուրերը Կադէսի մէջ ու մինչեւ մեծ ծովը իջնող հեղեղատը պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ ի սահմանացն Գադայ մինչեւ ցհարաւ եղիցի սահմանք նորա, [1047]ի Թեմանայ եւ ի ջրոցն Ռաբովթ Կադէս` ժառանգութիւն մի մինչեւ ցծովն`` մեծ:

48:28: Եւ ՚ի սահմանացն Գադայ մինչեւ ցհարա՛ւ եղիցի սահմանք նորա՝ ՚ի Թեմանայ եւ ՚ի ջրոցն Ռաբովթկադէս՝ ժառանգութիւն մի մինչեւ ցծովն մեծ[13112]։
[13112] Ոմանք. Եւ եղիցին սահմանք նորա... եւ ՚ի ջրոյն Ռաբովթ Կադէս։
28 Գադի սահմաններից մինչեւ հարաւ, Թեմանից ու Ռաբոթ Կադէսի ջրերից մինչեւ Մեծ ծովը կը լինի մէկ ժառանգութեան սահման:
28 Ու Գադի սահմանին քով հարաւային կողմը դէպի հարաւ երկրին սահմանը, Թամարէն մինչեւ Վիճաբանութեան ջուրերը Կադէսի մէջ ու մինչեւ մեծ ծովը իջնող հեղեղատը պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2848:28 А подле границы Гада на южной стороне идет южный предел от Тамары к водам пререкания при Кадисе, вдоль потока до великого моря.
48:28 καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away τῶν ο the ὁρίων οριον frontier τῶν ο the Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath ἕως εως till; until τῶν ο the πρὸς προς to; toward λίβα λιψ southwest wind καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be τὰ ο the ὅρια οριον frontier αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him ἀπὸ απο from; away Θαιμαν θαιμαν and; even ὕδατος υδωρ water Μαριμωθ μαριμωθ inheritance ἕως εως till; until τῆς ο the θαλάσσης θαλασσα sea τῆς ο the μεγάλης μεγας great; loud
48:28 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַל֙ ʕˌal עַל upon גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary גָּ֔ד gˈāḏ גָּד Gad אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to פְּאַ֖ת pᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner נֶ֣גֶב nˈeḡev נֶגֶב south תֵּימָ֑נָה têmˈānā תֵּימָן south וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֨ה hāyˌā היה be גְב֜וּל ḡᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary מִ mi מִן from תָּמָ֗ר ttāmˈār תָּמָר Tamar מֵ֚י ˈmê מַיִם water מְרִיבַ֣ת mᵊrîvˈaṯ מְרִיבָה quarrel קָדֵ֔שׁ qāḏˈēš קָדֵשׁ Kadesh נַחֲלָ֖ה naḥᵃlˌā נַחֲלָה heritage עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon הַ ha הַ the יָּ֥ם yyˌom יָם sea הַ ha הַ the גָּדֹֽול׃ ggāḏˈôl גָּדֹול great
48:28. et super terminum Gad ad plagam austri in meridiem et erit finis de Thamar usque ad aquas Contradictionis Cades hereditas contra mare magnumAnd by the border of Gad, the south side southward: and the border shall be from Thamar, even to the waters of contradiction of Cades, the inheritance over against the great sea.
28. And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward, the border shall be even from Tamar unto the waters of Meribath-kadesh, to the brook , unto the great sea.
48:28. And beyond the border of Gad, toward the southern region, in the meridian, the last part shall be from Tamar, even to the Waters of Contradiction at Kadesh, as the inheritance opposite the great sea.
And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward, the border shall be even from Tamar [unto] the waters of strife [in] Kadesh, [and] to the river toward the great sea:

48:28 А подле границы Гада на южной стороне идет южный предел от Тамары к водам пререкания при Кадисе, вдоль потока до великого моря.
48:28
καὶ και and; even
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τῶν ο the
ὁρίων οριον frontier
τῶν ο the
Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath
ἕως εως till; until
τῶν ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
λίβα λιψ southwest wind
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
τὰ ο the
ὅρια οριον frontier
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
ἀπὸ απο from; away
Θαιμαν θαιμαν and; even
ὕδατος υδωρ water
Μαριμωθ μαριμωθ inheritance
ἕως εως till; until
τῆς ο the
θαλάσσης θαλασσα sea
τῆς ο the
μεγάλης μεγας great; loud
48:28
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַל֙ ʕˌal עַל upon
גְּב֣וּל gᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
גָּ֔ד gˈāḏ גָּד Gad
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
פְּאַ֖ת pᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
נֶ֣גֶב nˈeḡev נֶגֶב south
תֵּימָ֑נָה têmˈānā תֵּימָן south
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֨ה hāyˌā היה be
גְב֜וּל ḡᵊvˈûl גְּבוּל boundary
מִ mi מִן from
תָּמָ֗ר ttāmˈār תָּמָר Tamar
מֵ֚י ˈmê מַיִם water
מְרִיבַ֣ת mᵊrîvˈaṯ מְרִיבָה quarrel
קָדֵ֔שׁ qāḏˈēš קָדֵשׁ Kadesh
נַחֲלָ֖ה naḥᵃlˌā נַחֲלָה heritage
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
הַ ha הַ the
יָּ֥ם yyˌom יָם sea
הַ ha הַ the
גָּדֹֽול׃ ggāḏˈôl גָּדֹול great
48:28. et super terminum Gad ad plagam austri in meridiem et erit finis de Thamar usque ad aquas Contradictionis Cades hereditas contra mare magnum
And by the border of Gad, the south side southward: and the border shall be from Thamar, even to the waters of contradiction of Cades, the inheritance over against the great sea.
28. And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward, the border shall be even from Tamar unto the waters of Meribath-kadesh, to the brook , unto the great sea.
48:28. And beyond the border of Gad, toward the southern region, in the meridian, the last part shall be from Tamar, even to the Waters of Contradiction at Kadesh, as the inheritance opposite the great sea.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
28. Подобно северной границе (ст. 1), описывается и южная в евр. дословно по XLVII:19; см. объяснение там. После “Гада” LXX: + “от восток”. - “Южный предел”, евр. темана, - Феман, см. объяснение там же. - “От Тамары”, греч. apo Qaiman, слав. “от юга” (в XLVII гл. - “от Фемана”), - нередкое употребление этого слова, но не подходящее здесь. - “К водам пререкания при Кадисе” -греч. kai 'udatoV barumwV KadhV, слав. “воды Варимоф-Кадиса”, неточная транскрипция евр. мериват, в XLVII гл. правильно Маримоф, но там неточно “Кадим”. - “Потока”, евр. нахала означает и наследство, посему LXX: “наследия” (в XLVll: “продолжающееся”).
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:28: From Tamar - in Kadesh - The former was on the south of the Dead Sea; and the latter, or Kadesh-Barnea, was still farther south, and at the extremity of the portion of Gad, which was the most southern tribe, as Dan was the most northern.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:28: from Tamar: Eze 47:19; Ch2 20:2
strife in Kadesh: Heb. Meribah-kadesh, Num 20:1, Num 20:13; Psa 106:32
the river: Gen 15:18; Num 34:5; Jos 13:3; Isa 27:12
the great sea: Eze 47:15, Eze 47:19, Eze 47:20
Geneva 1599
48:28 And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward, the (f) border shall be even from (g) Tamar [to] the waters of strife [in] Kadesh, [and] to the (h) river toward the great sea.
(f) Which is here taken for Idumea.
(g) Which was Jericho the city of palm trees.
(h) Meaning, the Nile that runs into the sea called the Mediterranean.
John Gill
48:28 And by the border of Gad, at the south side southward,.... Of the sanctuary of the Lord, of the portion of the priests and Levites, of the city, and what belonged to that, and of the prince's portion. The description begins at the northern part of the land, and ends in the southern:
the border shall be even from Tamar unto the waters of strife in Kadesh; and to the river toward the great sea; See Gill on Ezek 47:19.
John Wesley
48:28 To the river - The river of Egypt.
48:2948:29: Ա՛յս երկիր է զոր բաժանիցէք վիճակաւ ազգացն Իսրայէլի. եւ ա՛յս բաժինք նոցա ասէ Տէր Աստուած[13113]։ [13113] Ոմանք. Զոր բաժանեցէք վի՛՛։
29 Ահա սա է այն երկիրը, որ վիճակով բաժանելու էք Իսրայէլի ցեղերին, եւ սրանք են նրանց բաժինները», - ասում է Տէր Աստուած: -
29 «Այս է այն երկիրը, որ Իսրայէլի ցեղերուն վիճակով պիտի բաժնէք ժառանգութեան համար ու անոնց բաժինները ասոնք են», կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան։
Այս երկիր է զոր բաժանիցէք վիճակաւ ազգացն Իսրայելի, եւ այս բաժինք նոցա, ասէ Տէր Աստուած:

48:29: Ա՛յս երկիր է զոր բաժանիցէք վիճակաւ ազգացն Իսրայէլի. եւ ա՛յս բաժինք նոցա ասէ Տէր Աստուած[13113]։
[13113] Ոմանք. Զոր բաժանեցէք վի՛՛։
29 Ահա սա է այն երկիրը, որ վիճակով բաժանելու էք Իսրայէլի ցեղերին, եւ սրանք են նրանց բաժինները», - ասում է Տէր Աստուած: -
29 «Այս է այն երկիրը, որ Իսրայէլի ցեղերուն վիճակով պիտի բաժնէք ժառանգութեան համար ու անոնց բաժինները ասոնք են», կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:2948:29 Вот земля, которую вы по жребию разделите коленам Израилевым, и вот участки их, говорит Господь Бог.
48:29 αὕτη ουτος this; he ἡ ο the γῆ γη earth; land ἣν ος who; what βαλεῖτε βαλλω cast; throw ἐν εν in κλήρῳ κληρος lot; allotment ταῖς ο the φυλαῖς φυλη tribe Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel καὶ και and; even οὗτοι ουτος this; he οἱ ο the διαμερισμοὶ διαμερισμος division αὐτῶν αυτος he; him λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master θεός θεος God
48:29 זֹ֥את zˌōṯ זֹאת this הָ hā הַ the אָ֛רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] תַּפִּ֥ילוּ tappˌîlû נפל fall מִֽ mˈi מִן from נַּחֲלָ֖ה nnaḥᵃlˌā נַחֲלָה heritage לְ lᵊ לְ to שִׁבְטֵ֣י šivṭˈê שֵׁבֶט rod יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel וְ wᵊ וְ and אֵ֨לֶּה֙ ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these מַחְלְקֹותָ֔ם maḥlᵊqôṯˈām מַחֲלֹקֶת division נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech אֲדֹנָ֥י ʔᵃḏōnˌāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִֽה׃ פ [yᵊhwˈih] . f יְהוָה YHWH
48:29. haec est terra quam mittetis in sortem tribubus Israhel et hae partitiones earum ait Dominus DeusThis is the land which you shall divide by lot to the tribes of Israel: and these are the portions of them, saith the Lord God.
29. This is the land which ye shall divide by lot unto the tribes of Israel for inheritance, and these are their several portions, saith the Lord GOD.
48:29. This is the land that you shall distribute by lot to the tribes of Israel, and these shall be their portions, says the Lord God.
This [is] the land which ye shall divide by lot unto the tribes of Israel for inheritance, and these [are] their portions, saith the Lord GOD:

48:29 Вот земля, которую вы по жребию разделите коленам Израилевым, и вот участки их, говорит Господь Бог.
48:29
αὕτη ουτος this; he
ἡ ο the
γῆ γη earth; land
ἣν ος who; what
βαλεῖτε βαλλω cast; throw
ἐν εν in
κλήρῳ κληρος lot; allotment
ταῖς ο the
φυλαῖς φυλη tribe
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
καὶ και and; even
οὗτοι ουτος this; he
οἱ ο the
διαμερισμοὶ διαμερισμος division
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
θεός θεος God
48:29
זֹ֥את zˌōṯ זֹאת this
הָ hā הַ the
אָ֛רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative]
תַּפִּ֥ילוּ tappˌîlû נפל fall
מִֽ mˈi מִן from
נַּחֲלָ֖ה nnaḥᵃlˌā נַחֲלָה heritage
לְ lᵊ לְ to
שִׁבְטֵ֣י šivṭˈê שֵׁבֶט rod
יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֵ֨לֶּה֙ ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these
מַחְלְקֹותָ֔ם maḥlᵊqôṯˈām מַחֲלֹקֶת division
נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech
אֲדֹנָ֥י ʔᵃḏōnˌāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִֽה׃ פ [yᵊhwˈih] . f יְהוָה YHWH
48:29. haec est terra quam mittetis in sortem tribubus Israhel et hae partitiones earum ait Dominus Deus
This is the land which you shall divide by lot to the tribes of Israel: and these are the portions of them, saith the Lord God.
29. This is the land which ye shall divide by lot unto the tribes of Israel for inheritance, and these are their several portions, saith the Lord GOD.
48:29. This is the land that you shall distribute by lot to the tribes of Israel, and these shall be their portions, says the Lord God.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
29. “По жребию”, см. объяснение XLV:1: и XLVII:22. Как велики были уделы колен в представлении пророка? Если так точный в числовых данных пророк не указывает размера их, то должно быть потому, что их легко исчислить по даваемым им границам св. земли и величине священного участка. Протяжение св. земли от указанной пророком сев. границы до южной составит 3: 1/3: геогр. градуса, = 50: геогр. миль (350: верст = 371: километр). Ширина священного участка, если единицею меры его является “трость” XL:5, составит 10-11: геогр. миль. На долю 12: колен остается т.о. ок. 40: геогр. миль, - каждому колену 3: 1/3: мили. Длина участка с з. на в., равная ширине Ханаана от Иордана до Средиземного моря, около 11: миль (Следовательно, для князя по бокам священного участка остаются узкие полосы земли не более, чем в 1/2: мили шириной, при длине в 10: миль, = ширине священного участка).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:29: Eze 47:13-22; Num 34:2, Num 34:13; jos 13:1-21:45
John Gill
48:29 This is the land which ye shall divide by lot unto the tribes of Israel for inheritance,.... This is the land, as thus described; and these the tribes of Israel, or the Israelites indeed, who shall have their respective shares in it, as thus allotted to them for their inheritance; which is not of a worldly, but spiritual nature; and a goodly heritage it is, a place and a name better than sons and daughters; namely, a place in the house and church of God; and a right to enjoy all the ordinances of it:
and these are their portions, saith the Lord God; which he has appointed to them, of his grace bestows on them, and of which they may be assured, since he has said it: no mention is made of any cities of refuge in this division of the land, as in Joshua's time, because now the antitype of them is come, the Messiah, to whom all sensible sinners are directed to flee; and there is no other asylum for them, nor salvation in any other but in him; and besides, in this period there will be no manslayers, nor any that will hurt and destroy in all the holy mountain; and so no need of cities of refuge, Is 11:9.
48:3048:30: Եւ ա՛յս ելամուտ քաղաքին. ընդ կողմ հիւսւսոյ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն[13114]։ [13114] Ոմանք. Ելամուտք քաղաքին։
30 «Այժմ քաղաքի ելքի ու մուտքի դռների մասին. դրանցից հիւսիսային կողմի դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են:
30 «Քաղաքին ելքերը ասոնք են. Հիւսիսային կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով
Եւ այս ելամուտ քաղաքին. ընդ կողմ հիւսիսոյ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն:

48:30: Եւ ա՛յս ելամուտ քաղաքին. ընդ կողմ հիւսւսոյ չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն[13114]։
[13114] Ոմանք. Ելամուտք քաղաքին։
30 «Այժմ քաղաքի ելքի ու մուտքի դռների մասին. դրանցից հիւսիսային կողմի դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են:
30 «Քաղաքին ելքերը ասոնք են. Հիւսիսային կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3048:30 И вот выходы города: с северной стороны меры четыре тысячи пятьсот;
48:30 καὶ και and; even αὗται ουτος this; he αἱ ο the διεκβολαὶ διεκβολη the πόλεως πολις city αἱ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand καὶ και and; even πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred μέτρῳ μετρον measure
48:30 וְ wᵊ וְ and אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these תֹּוצְאֹ֣ת tôṣᵊʔˈōṯ תֹּוצָאֹות outlets הָ hā הַ the עִ֑יר ʕˈîr עִיר town מִ mi מִן from פְּאַ֣ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner צָפֹ֔ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north חֲמֵ֥שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹ֛ות mēʔˈôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֥עַת ʔarbˌaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֖ים ʔᵃlāfˌîm אֶלֶף thousand מִדָּֽה׃ middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch
48:30. et hii egressus civitatis a plaga septentrionali quingentos et quattuor milia mensurabisAnd these are the goings out of the city: on the north side thou shalt measure four thousand and five hundred.
30. And these are the goings out of the city; on the north side four thousand and five hundred by measure:
48:30. And these shall be the exits of the city: from the northern region, you shall measure four thousand and five hundred.
And these [are] the goings out of the city on the north side, four thousand and five hundred measures:

48:30 И вот выходы города: с северной стороны меры четыре тысячи пятьсот;
48:30
καὶ και and; even
αὗται ουτος this; he
αἱ ο the
διεκβολαὶ διεκβολη the
πόλεως πολις city
αἱ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
καὶ και and; even
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
μέτρῳ μετρον measure
48:30
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these
תֹּוצְאֹ֣ת tôṣᵊʔˈōṯ תֹּוצָאֹות outlets
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֑יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
מִ mi מִן from
פְּאַ֣ת ppᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
צָפֹ֔ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
חֲמֵ֥שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹ֛ות mēʔˈôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֥עַת ʔarbˌaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֖ים ʔᵃlāfˌîm אֶלֶף thousand
מִדָּֽה׃ middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch
48:30. et hii egressus civitatis a plaga septentrionali quingentos et quattuor milia mensurabis
And these are the goings out of the city: on the north side thou shalt measure four thousand and five hundred.
30. And these are the goings out of the city; on the north side four thousand and five hundred by measure:
48:30. And these shall be the exits of the city: from the northern region, you shall measure four thousand and five hundred.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
30. “выходы” - тоц'от, - трудно определить, чем отличается это понятие от “ворот”, которым посвящен этот отдел: должно быть большею общностью: включает и стены, длина которых повторяется здесь (ст. 16; ср. Притч IV:23; см. объяснение XLII:11). Это как бы общее надписание отдела.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:30: These are the goings out - Each of the four sides of the city was four thousand five hundred cubits long. There were three gates on each side, as mentioned below; and the whole circumference of the city was eighteen thousand cubits. See the map, plan B. dddd.
The rector of New Haven College, in New England, supposes the preceding representations to refer to the happy state of the Church in what is called the Millennium. Leaving this period out of the question, the following observations are worthy of notice: -
"The Jews, for whom this vision was intended, would conceive their country to be divided to the twelve tribes, in lots of a regular and mathematical form; and not confused or intermixed, as in Joshua's time. Their city laid out larger than before; and exactly foursquare, with regular suburbs; the temple and appendages much more commodious for their sacrifices, and the habitations of the priests and Levites regularly formed round about the temple. So that this whole plan of the division of the country, laying out of the city, temple, and all the appendages, appears to be perfectly regular and uniform, as if it were drawn all at one time, and by one hand, who had power to effect it; and therefore conveyed to the Jews the most complete idea they were capable of conceiving of the most perfect church, commonwealth, city, temple, and conveniences, for Divine worship.
I. The Holy Land, as described chap. 47 and 48, according to the original grant, being about two hundred and fifty miles long, north and south, and about one hundred and fifty miles wide, is divided, by parallel lines east and west, to the twelve tribes, each of them having a portion twenty miles wide. Only between Judah and Benjamin there is a holy portion near ten miles wide; in the middle of which is the holy oblation, twenty-five thousand cubits; that is, about ten miles square for the priests, Levites, city, and temple, Eze 45:1; Eze 48:8; the two ends are for the prince, Eze 45:7, etc.
II. The holy oblation, lying in the middle of the holy portion, is twenty-five thousand cubits square, which is near ten miles; of which ten thousand cubits, or four miles, are taken off from the north side for a habitation for the priests, and as much for the Levites on the south side, Eze 45:4, Eze 45:5, and Eze 48:20; and five thousand cubits in the middle for the city portion, Eze 45:6; in the middle of which is the city, four thousand five hundred cubits square, which is nearly two miles, Eze 48:15, Eze 48:16. Round about this is left two hundred and fifty cubits, near thirty rods, for suburbs, Eze 48:17. The remaining ten thousand cubits on the east side, and the ten thousand cubits on the west side, are for the profit of those who serve the city, out of all the tribes, Eze 48:18, Eze 48:19. The sanctuary is in the midst of the city, Eze 48:8.
III. The sanctuary or temple, and its appendages, were entirely surrounded with a wall six cubits high and six cubits thick, Eze 40:5; and five hundred cubits long on each side, Eze 42:15, etc., and Eze 45:2. In the middle square stands the temple, which was surrounded by a wall one hundred cubits long on each side, Eze 41:13, and six cubits thick, Eze 41:5. The side-chambers on the outside four cubits, Eze 41:5. The Holy of Holies, at the west end, was twenty cubits square on the inside, Eze 41:4. The holy place or outer court at the east end, was forty cubits, Eze 41:12. The length of the porch on the north side was twenty cubits; the breadth was eleven cubits, Eze 40:49; and the width of the separate place on the south side twenty cubits. On each side of the temple, towards the four gates in the outer wall, stood two courts, eight in the whole, each one hundred cubits square, Eze 40:19, Eze 40:23, Eze 40:27. In each of these were thirty-six little chambers or buildings, about six cubits square, viz., six at the entrance of the gate, Eze 40:7, Eze 40:17, Eze 40:20, etc., and thirty on the pavement, Eze 40:17, etc., which were for lodgings for the priests, for hanging up their garments, and their part of the sacrifices, Eze 42:13."
Calmet has constructed a map to show the position of the tribes, and the quantum of space each was to possess. As this will give a better view of the subject than any written description can, I have inserted one constructed for this work, which, consulting the places said to be connected with the possessions of the different tribes, shows that the tribes did not all possess the same quantum of space, five of the southern tribes possessing only one half as much as those of the north.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:30: The goings out of the city - The gates described in Eze 48:31. "Measures" (reeds) concern the sides. Divide the verses thus: Eze 48:30. "And these are the goings out of the city. Eze 48:31. On the north side 4500 measures: and the gates of the city after the names of the tribes of Israel: three gates northward etc."
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:30: the goings: Eze 48:16, Eze 48:32-35; Rev 21:16
four: It is certainly most obvious to interpret these measures, not of cubits, but of the measuring reed which the prophet's conductor had in his hand; according to which, the city would be about thirty-six miles in circumference, and nine miles on each side of the square; which was nearly nine times larger than the greatest extent to which Jerusalem ever attained (See note on Eze 42:15, and see note on Eze 42:16.) The large dimensions of the city and land were perhaps intended to intimate the extensive and glorious propagation of the gospel in the times predicted; and the land was not called Canaan, nor the city Jerusalem, probably because they were figurative of spiritual blessings to the church and to Israel.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
48:30
Size, Gates, and Name of the City
To complete the whole picture of the future land of Israel, what has been stated in Ezek 48:15 and Ezek 48:16 concerning the size of the holy city is still further expanded here. - Ezek 48:30. And these are the outgoings of the city from the north side, four thousand and five hundred (rods) measurement. Ezek 48:31. And the gates of the city according to the names of the tribes of Israel: three gates toward the north; the gate of Reuben one, the gate of Judah one, the gate of Levi one. Ezek 48:32. And on the east side four thousand five hundred (rods): and three gates; namely, the gate of Joseph one, the gate of Benjamin one, the gate of Dan one. Ezek 48:33. And to the south side, four thousand five hundred measurement: and three gates; the gate of Simeon one, the gate of Issachar one, the gate of Zebulon one. Ezek 48:34. To the west side, four thousand five hundred - their gates three; the gate of Gad one, the gate of Asher one, the gate of Naphtali one. Ezek 48:35. Round about, eighteen thousand (rods); and the name of the city: from henceforth Jehovah there. - The situation of the city of God within the terumah and its external dimensions have already been generally indicated in Ezek 48:15, Ezek 48:16. Here the measurement of the several sides is specified with a notice of their gates, and this is preceded by the heading, "the outlets of the city." תּוצאת, the outgoings (not extensions, for the word never has this meaning) as the furthest extremities in which a city or a tract of land terminates; not outlets or gates, which are expressly distinguished from them, but outgoing sides; hence the definition of the extent or length of the several sides is appended immediately afterwards. The enumeration commences, as above in the case of the land, with the north side. Each side has three gates, so that the whole city has twelve, which bear the names of the twelve tribes, like the gates of the heavenly Jerusalem in Rev_ 21:12, because it will be the city of the true people of God. Levi is included here, and consequently Ephraim and Manasseh are united in the one tribe of Joseph. The three sons of Leah commence the series with the northern gates. They also stand first in the blessing of Moses in Deut 33:6-8 : the first-born in age, the first-born by virtue of the patriarchal blessing, and the one chosen by Jehovah for His own service in the place of the first-born. Then follow, for the eastern gates, the two sons of Rachel, according to their age (thus deviating from Deut 33:12 and Deut 33:13), and, along with them, the elder son of Rachel's maid; for the southern gates, the three other sons of Leah; and lastly, for the western gates, the three other sons of the maids. Being thus indicated by the names of its gates as the city of all Israel, the city itself receives a name, which exalts it into the city of God (Jehovah). But different explanations have been given of the words in Ezek 48:35 which refer to this name. The allusion in מיום and the meaning of שׁמּה are both disputed points. It is true that the latter literally means "thither;" but Ezekiel also uses it as synonymous with שׁם, "there," in Ezek 23:3 and Ezek 32:29-30, so that the assertion that שׁמּה never means "there" is incorrect. מיום, from day forward, equivalent to henceforward; but not henceforth and for ever, though this may be implied in the context. Whether מיום be taken in connection with the preceding words, "the name of the city will henceforward be," or with those which follow, the name of the city will be, "henceforward Jehovah there," makes no material difference so far as the thought is concerned, as the city can only bear the name from the time when Jehovah is שׁמּה, and can only bear it so long as Jehovah is שׁמּה. But so far as the question is concerned, whether שׁמּה signifies thither or there in this passage, Hvernick is of opinion, indeed, that the whole of Ezekiel's vision does not harmonize with the meaning "there," inasmuch as he separates temple and city, so that Jehovah does not properly dwell in Jerusalem, but, in the strictest an highest sense, in His sanctuary, and turns thence to Jerusalem with the fulness of His grace and love. But if Jehovah does not merely direct His love toward the city from afar off, but, as Hvernick still further says, turns it fully toward it, causes His good pleasure to rest upon it, then He also rules and is in the city with His love, so that it can bear the name "Jehovah thither (there)." In any case, the interpretation, "Jehovah will from henceforth proceed thither, to restore it, to make it a holy city" (Kliefoth), is untenable; for the name is not given to Jerusalem when lying waste, but to the city already restored and fully built, which Ezekiel sees in the spirit. He has therefore before this turned His favour once more to Jerusalem, which was laid waste; and the name יהוה שׁמּה, given to the new Jerusalem, can only affirm that henceforward it is to be a city of Jehovah, i.e., that from this time forth Jehovah will be and rule in her. The rendering "Jehovah thither" does not answer to this, but only the rendering, "Jehovah will be there." compare Is 60:14, where Jerusalem is called the city of Jehovah, Zion of the Holy One in Israel, because the glory of Jehovah has risen over her as a brilliant light.
John Gill
48:30 And these are the goings out of the city,.... The gates of it, as Jarchi and Kimchi interpret it, by which they went out of it, and into it; and also the sides of it. The Lord here returns to the city again, to give an account of its circumference and name:
on the north side four thousand and five hundred measures; the north side of the city measured so many measures; that is, reeds, as Jarchi explains it.
48:3148:31: Եւ դրունք քաղաքին ըստ անուանց ազգացն Իսրայէլի. դրունք երեք ընդ կողմ հիւսւսոյ. դուռն մի Ռոբինի, եւ դուռն մի Յուդայ, եւ դուռն մի Ղեւեայ։
31 Քաղաքի դռները կը լինեն Իսրայէլի ցեղերի անուններով: Երեք դուռ հիւսիսային կողմում. մի դուռը՝ Ռուբէնի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Յուդայի եւ մի դուռը՝ Ղեւիի:
31 (Ու քաղաքին դռները Իսրայէլի ցեղերուն անուններուն համեմատ պիտի ըլլան). երեք դուռ դէպի հիւսիս. մէկ դուռ Ռուբէնին, մէկ դուռ Յուդային ու մէկ դուռ Ղեւիին
Եւ դրունք քաղաքին ըստ անուանց ազգացն Իսրայելի. դրունք երեք ընդ կողմ հիւսիսոյ. դուռն մի Ռուբենի եւ դուռն մի Յուդայ եւ դուռն մի Ղեւեայ:

48:31: Եւ դրունք քաղաքին ըստ անուանց ազգացն Իսրայէլի. դրունք երեք ընդ կողմ հիւսւսոյ. դուռն մի Ռոբինի, եւ դուռն մի Յուդայ, եւ դուռն մի Ղեւեայ։
31 Քաղաքի դռները կը լինեն Իսրայէլի ցեղերի անուններով: Երեք դուռ հիւսիսային կողմում. մի դուռը՝ Ռուբէնի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Յուդայի եւ մի դուռը՝ Ղեւիի:
31 (Ու քաղաքին դռները Իսրայէլի ցեղերուն անուններուն համեմատ պիտի ըլլան). երեք դուռ դէպի հիւսիս. մէկ դուռ Ռուբէնին, մէկ դուռ Յուդային ու մէկ դուռ Ղեւիին
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3148:31 и ворота города называются именами колен Израилевых; к северу трое ворот: ворота Рувимовы одни, ворота Иудины одни, ворота Левиины одни.
48:31 καὶ και and; even αἱ ο the πύλαι πυλη gate τῆς ο the πόλεως πολις city ἐπ᾿ επι in; on ὀνόμασιν ονομα name; notable φυλῶν φυλη tribe τοῦ ο the Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel πύλαι πυλη gate τρεῖς τρεις three πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind πύλη πυλη gate Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Λευι λευι Leuΐ; Lei μία εις.1 one; unit
48:31 וְ wᵊ וְ and שַׁעֲרֵ֣י šaʕᵃrˈê שַׁעַר gate הָ hā הַ the עִ֗יר ʕˈîr עִיר town עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon שְׁמֹות֙ šᵊmôṯ שֵׁם name שִׁבְטֵ֣י šivṭˈê שֵׁבֶט rod יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel שְׁעָרִ֥ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate שְׁלֹושָׁ֖ה šᵊlôšˌā שָׁלֹשׁ three צָפֹ֑ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate רְאוּבֵ֞ן rᵊʔûvˈēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate יְהוּדָה֙ yᵊhûḏˌā יְהוּדָה Judah אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate לֵוִ֖י lēwˌî לֵוִי Levi אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:31. et portae civitatis in nominibus tribuum Israhel portae tres a septentrione porta Ruben una porta Iudae una porta Levi unaAnd the gates of the city according to the name, of the tribes of Israel, three gates on the north side, the gate of Ruben one, the gate of Juda one, the gate of Levi one.
31. and the gates of the city shall be after the names of the tribes of Israel; three gates northward: the gate of Reuben, one; the gate of Judah, one; the gate of Levi, one:
48:31. And the gates of the city shall be according to the names of the tribes of Israel. There shall be three gates from the north: the gate of Reuben one, the gate of Judah one, the gate of Levi one.
And the gates of the city [shall be] after the names of the tribes of Israel: three gates northward; one gate of Reuben, one gate of Judah, one gate of Levi:

48:31 и ворота города называются именами колен Израилевых; к северу трое ворот: ворота Рувимовы одни, ворота Иудины одни, ворота Левиины одни.
48:31
καὶ και and; even
αἱ ο the
πύλαι πυλη gate
τῆς ο the
πόλεως πολις city
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
ὀνόμασιν ονομα name; notable
φυλῶν φυλη tribe
τοῦ ο the
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
πύλαι πυλη gate
τρεῖς τρεις three
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
πύλη πυλη gate
Ρουβην ρουβην Reuben
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Ιουδα ιουδα Iouda; Iutha
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Λευι λευι Leuΐ; Lei
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:31
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שַׁעֲרֵ֣י šaʕᵃrˈê שַׁעַר gate
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֗יר ʕˈîr עִיר town
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
שְׁמֹות֙ šᵊmôṯ שֵׁם name
שִׁבְטֵ֣י šivṭˈê שֵׁבֶט rod
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
שְׁעָרִ֥ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate
שְׁלֹושָׁ֖ה šᵊlôšˌā שָׁלֹשׁ three
צָפֹ֑ונָה ṣāfˈônā צָפֹון north
שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
רְאוּבֵ֞ן rᵊʔûvˈēn רְאוּבֵן Reuben
אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
יְהוּדָה֙ yᵊhûḏˌā יְהוּדָה Judah
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate
לֵוִ֖י lēwˌî לֵוִי Levi
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:31. et portae civitatis in nominibus tribuum Israhel portae tres a septentrione porta Ruben una porta Iudae una porta Levi una
And the gates of the city according to the name, of the tribes of Israel, three gates on the north side, the gate of Ruben one, the gate of Juda one, the gate of Levi one.
31. and the gates of the city shall be after the names of the tribes of Israel; three gates northward: the gate of Reuben, one; the gate of Judah, one; the gate of Levi, one:
48:31. And the gates of the city shall be according to the names of the tribes of Israel. There shall be three gates from the north: the gate of Reuben one, the gate of Judah one, the gate of Levi one.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
31. “И ворота города называются племенами колен Израилевых”, чем обозначается участие в населении города всех колен: ст. 19. Замечание, которое было бы более на месте после 30а; новейшие ставят его там. Трое северных ворот, естественно, принадлежат трем коленам, живущим на ближайшем к городу севере.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
31 And the gates of the city shall be after the names of the tribes of Israel: three gates northward; one gate of Reuben, one gate of Judah, one gate of Levi. 32 And at the east side four thousand and five hundred: and three gates; and one gate of Joseph, one gate of Benjamin, one gate of Dan. 33 And at the south side four thousand and five hundred measures: and three gates; one gate of Simeon, one gate of Issachar, one gate of Zebulun. 34 At the west side four thousand and five hundred, with their three gates; one gate of Gad, one gate of Asher, one gate of Naphtali. 35 It was round about eighteen thousand measures: and the name of the city from that day shall be, The LORD is there.
We have here a further account of the city that should be built for the metropolis of this glorious land, and to be the receptacle of those who would come from all parts to worship in the sanctuary adjoining. It is nowhere called Jerusalem, nor is the land which we have had such a particular account of the dividing of any where called the land of Canaan; for the old names are forgotten, to intimate that the old things are done away, behold all things have become new. Now, concerning this city, observe here, 1. The measures of its out-lets, and the grounds belonging to it, for its several conveniences; each way its appurtenances extended 4500 measures 18,000 in all, v. 35. But what these measures were is uncertain. It is never said, in all this chapter, whether so many reeds (as our translation determines by inserting that word, v. 8, each reed containing six cubits and span, ch. xl. 5, and why should the measurer appear with the measuring reed in his hand of that length if he did not measure with that, except where it is expressly said he measured by cubits?) or whether, as others think, it is so many cubits, because those are mentioned ch. xlv. 2 and ch. xlvii. 3. Yet that makes me incline rather to think that where cubits are not mentioned must be intended so many lengths of the measuring reed. But those who understand it of so many cubits are not agreed whether it be meant of the common cubit, which was half a yard, or the geometrical cubit, which, for better expedition, is supposed to be mostly used in surveying lands, which, some say, contained six cubits, others about three cubits and a half, so making 1000 cubits the same with 1000 paces, that is, an English mile. But our being left at this uncertainty is an intimation that these things are to be understood spiritually, and that what is principally meant is that there is an exact and just proportion observed by Infinite Wisdom in modelling the gospel church, which though now we cannot discern we shall when we come to heaven. 2. The number of its gates. It had twelve gates in all, three on each side, which was very agreeable when it lay four square; and these twelve gates were inscribed to the twelve tribes. Because the city was to be served out of all the tribes of Israel (v. 19) it was fit that each tribe should have its gate; and, Levi being here taken in, to keep to the number twelve Ephraim and Manasseh are made one in Joseph, v. 32. On the north side were the gates of Reuben, Judah, and Levi (v. 31), on the east the gates of Joseph, Benjamin, and Dan (v. 32), on the south the gates of Simeon, Issachar, and Zebulun (v. 33), and on the west the gates of Gad, Asher, and Naphtali, v. 34. Conformable to this, in St. John's vision, the new Jerusalem (for so the holy city is called there, though not here) has twelve gates, three on a side, and on them are written the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel, Rev. xxi. 12, 13. Note, Into the church of Christ, both militant and triumphant, there is a free access by faith for all that come of every tribe, from every quarter. Christ has opened the kingdom of heaven for all believers. Whoever will may come and take of the water of life, of the tree of life, freely. 3. The name given to this city: From that day, when it shall be newly-erected according to this model, the name of it shall be, not, as before, Jerusalem--The vision of peace, but which is the original of that, and more than equivalent to it, Jehovah Shammah--The Lord is there, v. 35. This intimated, (1.) That the captives, after their return, should have manifest tokens of God's presence with them and his residence among them, both in his ordinances and his providences. They shall have no occasion to ask, as their fathers did, Is the Lord among us, or is he not? for they shall see and say that he is with them of a truth. And then, though their troubles were many and threatening, they were like the bush which burned but was not consumed, because the Lord was there. But when God departed from their temple, when he said, Migremus hinc--Let us go hence, their house was soon left unto them desolate. Being no longer his, it was not much longer theirs. (2.) That the gospel-church should likewise have the presence of God in it, though not in the Shechinah, as of old, yet in a token of it no less sure, that of his Spirit. Where the gospel is faithfully preached, gospel ordinances are duly administered, and God is worshipped in the name of Jesus Christ only, it may truly be said, The Lord is there; for faithful is he that has said, and he will be as good as his word, Lo, I am with you always even unto the end of the world. The Lord is there in his church, to rule and govern it, to protect and defend it, and graciously to accept and own his sincere worshippers, and to be nigh unto them in all that they call upon him for. This should engage us to keep close to the communion of saints, for the Lord is there; and then whither shall we go to better ourselves? Nay, it is true of every good Christian; he dwells in God, and God in him; whatever soul has in it a living principle of grace, it may be truly said, The Lord is There. (3.) That the glory and happiness of heaven should consist chiefly in this, that the Lord is there. St. John's representation of that blessed state does indeed far exceed this in many respects. That is all gold, and pearls, and precious stones; it is much larger than this, and much brighter, for it needs not the light of the sun. But, in making the presence of God the principal matter of its bliss, they both agree. There the happiness of the glorified saints is made to be that God himself shall be with them (Rev. xxi. 3), that he who sits on the throne shall dwell among them, Rev. vii. 15. And here it is made to crown the bliss of this holy city that the Lord is there. Let us therefore give all diligence to make sure to ourselves a place in that city, that we may be for ever with the Lord.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:31: Isa 26:1, Isa 26:2, Isa 54:12, Isa 60:11; Rev 21:12, Rev 21:13, Rev 21:21, Rev 21:25
John Gill
48:31 And the gates of the city shall be after names of the tribes of Israel,.... According to number of them, twelve, and called by their names; the names of the several tribes being written on them; see Rev_ 21:12, this shows that all true Israelites indeed, Israel not after the flesh, but after the Spirit, have a right of entrance into, and communion with, the church of God; even the whole Israel of God, whom he has chosen for himself; Christ has redeemed by his blood, and the Spirit calls by his grace, and sanctifies; these are all, be they Jews or Gentiles, fellow citizens with the saints, and of the household of God: these gates, though twelve, with respect to the twelve tribes that enter in at them, and the twelve apostles of the Lamb that direct unto them, and whose doctrine they embrace and profess that go in by them; yet are but one in the main, which is Christ, faith in him, and a profession of it, and a professed subjection to his Gospel and ordinances, Jn 10:1,
three gates northward; for those that lay on that side to enter in at:
one gate of Reuben, one gate of Judah, and one gate of Levi: these tribes, and so the rest, were not placed according to their encampment about the tabernacle in the wilderness, or as they were placed by Joshua in the land of Canaan; which shows that the tribes literally considered are not intended. Levi had a gate, though it had not a portion in the manner the other tribes had.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:31 gates-- (Rev_ 21:12, &c.). The twelve gates bear the names of the twelve tribes to imply that all are regarded as having an interest in it.
48:3248:32: Եւ ընդ կողմ արեւելից չորք հազարք՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Յովսեփայ, եւ դուռն մի Բենիամինի, եւ դուռն մի Դանայ։
32 Արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Յովսէփի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Բենիամինի եւ մի դուռը՝ Դանի:
32 Եւ արեւելեան կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով՝ երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Յովսէփին, մէկ դուռ Բենիամինին ու մէկ դուռ Դանին
Եւ ընդ կողմ արեւելից չորք հազարք եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն, եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Յովսեփայ եւ դուռն մի Բենիամինի եւ դուռն մի Դանայ:

48:32: Եւ ընդ կողմ արեւելից չորք հազարք՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Յովսեփայ, եւ դուռն մի Բենիամինի, եւ դուռն մի Դանայ։
32 Արեւելքի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Յովսէփի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Բենիամինի եւ մի դուռը՝ Դանի:
32 Եւ արեւելեան կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով՝ երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Յովսէփին, մէկ դուռ Բենիամինին ու մէկ դուռ Դանին
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3248:32 И с восточной стороны {меры} четыре тысячи пятьсот, и трое ворот: ворота Иосифовы одни, ворота Вениаминовы одни, ворота Дановы одни;
48:32 καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand καὶ και and; even πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred καὶ και and; even πύλαι πυλη gate τρεῖς τρεις three πύλη πυλη gate Ιωσηφ ιωσηφ Iōsēph; Iosif μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Δαν δαν one; unit
48:32 וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to פְּאַ֣ת pᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner קָדִ֗ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand וּ û וְ and שְׁעָרִ֖ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three וְ wᵊ וְ and שַׁ֨עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate יֹוסֵ֜ף yôsˈēf יֹוסֵף Joseph אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate בִּנְיָמִן֙ binyāmˌin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate דָּ֖ן dˌān דָּן Dan אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:32. et ad plagam orientalem quingentos et quattuor milia et portae tres porta Ioseph una porta Beniamin una porta Dan unaAnd at the east side, four thousand and five hundred: and three gates, the gate of Joseph one, the gate of Benjamin one, the gate of Dan one.
32. And at the east side four thousand and five hundred ; and three gates: even the gate of Joseph, one; the gate of Benjamin, one; the gate of Dan, one:
48:32. And to the eastern region, there shall be four thousand and five hundred. And there shall be three gates: the gate of Joseph one, the gate of Benjamin one, the gate of Dan one.
And at the east side four thousand and five hundred: and three gates; and one gate of Joseph, one gate of Benjamin, one gate of Dan:

48:32 И с восточной стороны {меры} четыре тысячи пятьсот, и трое ворот: ворота Иосифовы одни, ворота Вениаминовы одни, ворота Дановы одни;
48:32
καὶ και and; even
τὰ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
ἀνατολὰς ανατολη springing up; east
τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
καὶ και and; even
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
καὶ και and; even
πύλαι πυλη gate
τρεῖς τρεις three
πύλη πυλη gate
Ιωσηφ ιωσηφ Iōsēph; Iosif
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Βενιαμιν βενιαμιν Beniamin; Veniamin
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Δαν δαν one; unit
48:32
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
פְּאַ֣ת pᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
קָדִ֗ימָה qāḏˈîmā קָדִים east
חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
וּ û וְ and
שְׁעָרִ֖ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate
שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שַׁ֨עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate
יֹוסֵ֜ף yôsˈēf יֹוסֵף Joseph
אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
בִּנְיָמִן֙ binyāmˌin בִּנְיָמִן Benjamin
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate
דָּ֖ן dˌān דָּן Dan
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:32. et ad plagam orientalem quingentos et quattuor milia et portae tres porta Ioseph una porta Beniamin una porta Dan una
And at the east side, four thousand and five hundred: and three gates, the gate of Joseph one, the gate of Benjamin one, the gate of Dan one.
32. And at the east side four thousand and five hundred ; and three gates: even the gate of Joseph, one; the gate of Benjamin, one; the gate of Dan, one:
48:32. And to the eastern region, there shall be four thousand and five hundred. And there shall be three gates: the gate of Joseph one, the gate of Benjamin one, the gate of Dan one.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
32. Основание для предоставления восточных ворот этим коленам, - см. предв. зам, к главе. Ефрем и Манассия объединяются в одно колено, потому что Левин получает особые ворота.
John Gill
48:32 And at the east side four thousand and five hundred,.... Measures or reeds: this side was equal to the north, as the rest were to this; the whole city in its circumference making an equilateral square:
and three gates; which were as follow:
one gate of Joseph, one gate of Benjamin, one gate of Dan; Joseph is here as having a gate, though he is not mentioned as having a portion; but his two sons, Ephraim and Manasseh, who are here omitted; which made room for Levi's name to be inserted; and Dan, who had his portion first, is here placed in the middle, no order being observed; the whole being mystical and spiritual.
48:3348:33: Եւ ընդ կողմ հարաւոյ չորք հազարք՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Շմաւոնի, եւ դուռն մի Իսաքարայ, եւ դուռն մի Զաբուղոնի։
33 Հարաւի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Շմաւոնի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Իսաքարի եւ մի դուռը՝ Զաբուղոնի:
33 Եւ հարաւային կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով, երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Շմաւոնին, մէկ դուռ Իսաքարին ու մէկ դուռ Զաբուղոնին.
Եւ ընդ կողմ հարաւոյ չորք հազարք եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն, եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Շմաւոնի եւ դուռն մի Իսաքարայ եւ դուռն մի Զաբուղոնի:

48:33: Եւ ընդ կողմ հարաւոյ չորք հազարք՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Շմաւոնի, եւ դուռն մի Իսաքարայ, եւ դուռն մի Զաբուղոնի։
33 Հարաւի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Շմաւոնի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Իսաքարի եւ մի դուռը՝ Զաբուղոնի:
33 Եւ հարաւային կողմէն չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով, երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Շմաւոնին, մէկ դուռ Իսաքարին ու մէկ դուռ Զաբուղոնին.
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3348:33 и с южной стороны меры четыре тысячи пятьсот, и трое ворот: ворота Симеоновы одни, ворота Иссахаровы одни, ворота Завулоновы одни.
48:33 καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand καὶ και and; even πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred μέτρῳ μετρον measure καὶ και and; even πύλαι πυλη gate τρεῖς τρεις three πύλη πυλη gate Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon μία εις.1 one; unit
48:33 וּ û וְ and פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner נֶ֗גְבָּה nˈeḡbā נֶגֶב south חֲמֵ֨שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹ֜ות mēʔˈôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֤עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִים֙ ʔᵃlāfîm אֶלֶף thousand מִדָּ֔ה middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch וּ û וְ and שְׁעָרִ֖ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate שִׁמְעֹ֞ון šimʕˈôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate יִשָּׂשכָר֙ yiśśāŝḵˌār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate זְבוּלֻ֖ן zᵊvûlˌun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:33. et ad plagam meridianam quingentos et quattuor milia metieris portam Symeonis unam portam Isachar unam portam Zabulon unamAnd at the south side, thou shalt measure four thousand and five hundred and three gates, the gate of Simeon one, the gate of Issachar one, the gate of Zabulon one.
33. And at the south side four thousand and five hundred by measure; and three gates: the gate of Simeon, one; the gate of Issachar, one; the gate of Zebulun, one.
48:33. And to the southern region, you shall measure four thousand and five hundred. And there shall be three gates: the gate of Simeon one, the gate of Issachar one, the gate of Zebulun one.
And at the south side four thousand and five hundred measures: and three gates; one gate of Simeon, one gate of Issachar, one gate of Zebulun:

48:33 и с южной стороны меры четыре тысячи пятьсот, и трое ворот: ворота Симеоновы одни, ворота Иссахаровы одни, ворота Завулоновы одни.
48:33
καὶ και and; even
τὰ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
καὶ και and; even
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
μέτρῳ μετρον measure
καὶ και and; even
πύλαι πυλη gate
τρεῖς τρεις three
πύλη πυλη gate
Συμεων συμεων Symeōn; Simeon
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Ισσαχαρ ισσαχαρ Issachar; Issakhar
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Ζαβουλων ζαβουλων Zaboulōn; Zavulon
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:33
וּ û וְ and
פְאַת־ fᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
נֶ֗גְבָּה nˈeḡbā נֶגֶב south
חֲמֵ֨שׁ ḥᵃmˌēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹ֜ות mēʔˈôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֤עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִים֙ ʔᵃlāfîm אֶלֶף thousand
מִדָּ֔ה middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch
וּ û וְ and
שְׁעָרִ֖ים šᵊʕārˌîm שַׁעַר gate
שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three
שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
שִׁמְעֹ֞ון šimʕˈôn שִׁמְעֹון Simeon
אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
יִשָּׂשכָר֙ yiśśāŝḵˌār יִשָּׂשׂכָר Issachar
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate
זְבוּלֻ֖ן zᵊvûlˌun זְבוּלֻן Zebulun
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:33. et ad plagam meridianam quingentos et quattuor milia metieris portam Symeonis unam portam Isachar unam portam Zabulon unam
And at the south side, thou shalt measure four thousand and five hundred and three gates, the gate of Simeon one, the gate of Issachar one, the gate of Zabulon one.
33. And at the south side four thousand and five hundred by measure; and three gates: the gate of Simeon, one; the gate of Issachar, one; the gate of Zebulun, one.
48:33. And to the southern region, you shall measure four thousand and five hundred. And there shall be three gates: the gate of Simeon one, the gate of Issachar one, the gate of Zebulun one.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
33-34. См. предв. зам. к главе, 2-я тирада.
John Gill
48:33 The south side of the city measured just the same as the north and east sides did:
and three gates; were on that side, as on the others:
one gate of Simeon, one gate of Issachar, one gate of Zebulun; at which these tribes entered, or those they represent.
48:3448:34: Եւ ընդ կողմն ծովու չորք հազար՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Գադայ, եւ դուռն մի Ասերայ, եւ դուռն մի Նեփթաղիմայ։
34 Արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Գադի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Ասերի եւ մի դուռը՝ Նեփթաղիմի:
34 Արեւմտեան կողմէն ալ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով՝ երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Գադին, մէկ դուռ Ասերին ու մէկ դուռ Նեփթաղիմին։
Եւ ընդ կողմն ծովու չորք հազար եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն, եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Գադայ եւ դուռն մի Ասերայ եւ դուռն մի Նեփթաղիմայ:

48:34: Եւ ընդ կողմն ծովու չորք հազար՝ եւ հինգ հարեւր չափովն. եւ դրունք երեք. դուռն մի Գադայ, եւ դուռն մի Ասերայ, եւ դուռն մի Նեփթաղիմայ։
34 Արեւմուտքի ուղղութեամբ էլ դռները չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր ձողաչափ են: Երեք դուռ. մի դուռը՝ Գադի անունով, մի դուռը՝ Ասերի եւ մի դուռը՝ Նեփթաղիմի:
34 Արեւմտեան կողմէն ալ չորս հազար հինգ հարիւր չափ ըլլալով՝ երեք դուռ պիտի ըլլայ. մէկ դուռ Գադին, մէկ դուռ Ասերին ու մէկ դուռ Նեփթաղիմին։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3448:34 С морской стороны {меры} четыре тысячи пятьсот, ворот здесь трое же: ворота Гадовы одни, ворота Асировы одни, ворота Неффалимовы одни.
48:34 καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand καὶ και and; even πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred μέτρῳ μετρον measure καὶ και and; even πύλαι πυλη gate τρεῖς τρεις three πύλη πυλη gate Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir μία εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πύλη πυλη gate Νεφθαλιμ νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim μία εις.1 one; unit
48:34 פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner יָ֗מָּה yˈommā יָם sea חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand שַֽׁעֲרֵיהֶ֖ם šˈaʕᵃrêhˌem שַׁעַר gate שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate גָּ֞ד gˈāḏ גָּד Gad אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate אָשֵׁר֙ ʔāšˌēr אָשֵׁר Asher אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate נַפְתָּלִ֖י naftālˌî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:34. et ad plagam occidentalem quingenti et quattuor milia portae eorum tres porta Gad una porta Aser una porta Nepthalim unaAnd at the west side, four thousand and five hundred, and their three gates, the gate of Gad one, the gate of Aser one, the gate of Nephthali one.
34. At the west side four thousand and five hundred , with their three gates: the gate of Gad, one; the gate of Asher, one; the gate of Naphtali, one.
48:34. And to the western region, there shall be four thousand and five hundred, and their three gates: the gate of Gad one, the gate of Asher one, the gate of Naphtali one.
At the west side four thousand and five hundred, [with] their three gates; one gate of Gad, one gate of Asher, one gate of Naphtali:

48:34 С морской стороны {меры} четыре тысячи пятьсот, ворот здесь трое же: ворота Гадовы одни, ворота Асировы одни, ворота Неффалимовы одни.
48:34
καὶ και and; even
τὰ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
τετρακισχίλιοι τετρακισχιλιοι four thousand
καὶ και and; even
πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοι five hundred
μέτρῳ μετρον measure
καὶ και and; even
πύλαι πυλη gate
τρεῖς τρεις three
πύλη πυλη gate
Γαδ γαδ Gad; Gath
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Ασηρ ασηρ Asēr; Asir
μία εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πύλη πυλη gate
Νεφθαλιμ νεφθαλειμ Nephthaleim; Nefthalim
μία εις.1 one; unit
48:34
פְּאַת־ pᵊʔaṯ- פֵּאָה corner
יָ֗מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
מֵאֹות֙ mēʔôṯ מֵאָה hundred
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבַּ֣עַת ʔarbˈaʕaṯ אַרְבַּע four
אֲלָפִ֔ים ʔᵃlāfˈîm אֶלֶף thousand
שַֽׁעֲרֵיהֶ֖ם šˈaʕᵃrêhˌem שַׁעַר gate
שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה šᵊlōšˈā שָׁלֹשׁ three
שַׁ֣עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
גָּ֞ד gˈāḏ גָּד Gad
אֶחָ֗ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֤עַר šˈaʕar שַׁעַר gate
אָשֵׁר֙ ʔāšˌēr אָשֵׁר Asher
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
שַׁ֥עַר šˌaʕar שַׁעַר gate
נַפְתָּלִ֖י naftālˌî נַפְתָּלִי Naphtali
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
48:34. et ad plagam occidentalem quingenti et quattuor milia portae eorum tres porta Gad una porta Aser una porta Nepthalim una
And at the west side, four thousand and five hundred, and their three gates, the gate of Gad one, the gate of Aser one, the gate of Nephthali one.
34. At the west side four thousand and five hundred , with their three gates: the gate of Gad, one; the gate of Asher, one; the gate of Naphtali, one.
48:34. And to the western region, there shall be four thousand and five hundred, and their three gates: the gate of Gad one, the gate of Asher one, the gate of Naphtali one.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jg▾ all ▾
John Gill
48:34 At the west side four thousand and five hundred,.... Measures or reeds; so many were the length of this side; the same with north, south, and east, and made a foursquare; and such the city was, as the New Jerusalem is said to be, Rev_ 21:16,
with their three gates: one gate of Gad, one gate of Asher, one gate of Naphtali; the situation of these gates on all sides, east, west, north, and south, show that in the latter day people will flock from all quarters to the church of Christ, and that there will be an open and free access of all persons into it; see Is 2:2.
48:3548:35: Շուրջ շրջանակաւ՝ ութուտասն հազար. եւ անուն քաղաքին յորմէհետէ եղիցի անդ Տէր, Տէր եղիցի անուն նորա[13115]։[13115] Ոմանք. Ութ եւ տասն հազար։ Ուր Ոսկան. Ութ եւ տասն. եւ անուն։ Բազումք. Յորմէհետէ լինիցի անդ, Տէր եղիցի ա՛՛։
35 Ընդհանուր շրջագիծը՝ տասնութ հազար ձողաչափ: Եւ այդ օրից քաղաքի անունը կը լինի “Տէրն այնտեղ է”»:
35 Բոլոր շրջապատը տասնըութ հազար չափ պիտի ըլլայ ու այն օրէն քաղաքին անունը Եհովաշամա* պիտի ըլլայ»։
Շուրջ շրջանակաւ` ութուտասն հազար. եւ անուն քաղաքին [1048]յորմէհետէ լինիցի. Անդ Տէր եղիցի անուն նորա:

48:35: Շուրջ շրջանակաւ՝ ութուտասն հազար. եւ անուն քաղաքին յորմէհետէ եղիցի անդ Տէր, Տէր եղիցի անուն նորա[13115]։
[13115] Ոմանք. Ութ եւ տասն հազար։ Ուր Ոսկան. Ութ եւ տասն. եւ անուն։ Բազումք. Յորմէհետէ լինիցի անդ, Տէր եղիցի ա՛՛։
35 Ընդհանուր շրջագիծը՝ տասնութ հազար ձողաչափ: Եւ այդ օրից քաղաքի անունը կը լինի “Տէրն այնտեղ է”»:
35 Բոլոր շրջապատը տասնըութ հազար չափ պիտի ըլլայ ու այն օրէն քաղաքին անունը Եհովաշամա* պիտի ըլլայ»։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
48:3548:35 Всего кругом восемнадцать тысяч. А имя городу с того дня будет: >.
48:35 κύκλωμα κυκλωμα ten καὶ και and; even ὀκτὼ οκτω eight χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the ὄνομα ονομα name; notable τῆς ο the πόλεως πολις city ἀφ᾿ απο from; away ἧς ος who; what ἂν αν perhaps; ever ἡμέρας ημερα day γένηται γινομαι happen; become ἔσται ειμι be τὸ ο the ὄνομα ονομα name; notable αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
48:35 סָבִ֕יב sāvˈîv סָבִיב surrounding שְׁמֹנָ֥ה šᵊmōnˌā שְׁמֹנֶה eight עָשָׂ֖ר ʕāśˌār עָשָׂר -teen אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand וְ wᵊ וְ and שֵׁם־ šēm- שֵׁם name הָ hā הַ the עִ֥יר ʕˌîr עִיר town מִ mi מִן from יֹּ֖ום yyˌôm יֹום day יְהוָ֥ה׀ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH שָֽׁמָּה׃ šˈāmmā שָׁם there
48:35. per circuitum decem et octo milia et nomen civitatis ex illa die Dominus ibidemIts circumference was eighteen thousand: and the name of the city from that day, The Lord is there.
35. It shall be eighteen thousand round about: and the name of the city from that day shall be, The LORD is there.
48:35. Along circumference, there shall be eighteen thousand. And the name of the city, from that day, shall be: ‘The Lord is in that very place.’ ”
It was round about eighteen thousand [measures]: and the name of the city from [that] day [shall be], The LORD [is] there:

48:35 Всего кругом восемнадцать тысяч. А имя городу с того дня будет: <<Господь там>>.
48:35
κύκλωμα κυκλωμα ten
καὶ και and; even
ὀκτὼ οκτω eight
χιλιάδες χιλιας thousand
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
ὄνομα ονομα name; notable
τῆς ο the
πόλεως πολις city
ἀφ᾿ απο from; away
ἧς ος who; what
ἂν αν perhaps; ever
ἡμέρας ημερα day
γένηται γινομαι happen; become
ἔσται ειμι be
τὸ ο the
ὄνομα ονομα name; notable
αὐτῆς αυτος he; him
48:35
סָבִ֕יב sāvˈîv סָבִיב surrounding
שְׁמֹנָ֥ה šᵊmōnˌā שְׁמֹנֶה eight
עָשָׂ֖ר ʕāśˌār עָשָׂר -teen
אָ֑לֶף ʔˈālef אֶלֶף thousand
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שֵׁם־ šēm- שֵׁם name
הָ hā הַ the
עִ֥יר ʕˌîr עִיר town
מִ mi מִן from
יֹּ֖ום yyˌôm יֹום day
יְהוָ֥ה׀ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH
שָֽׁמָּה׃ šˈāmmā שָׁם there
48:35. per circuitum decem et octo milia et nomen civitatis ex illa die Dominus ibidem
Its circumference was eighteen thousand: and the name of the city from that day, The Lord is there.
35. It shall be eighteen thousand round about: and the name of the city from that day shall be, The LORD is there.
48:35. Along circumference, there shall be eighteen thousand. And the name of the city, from that day, shall be: ‘The Lord is in that very place.’ ”
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ catholic_pdv▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
35. “Восемнадцать тысяч” см. объяснение ст. 16. - “С того дня”, со дня создания города; евр. миййом может означать и “отныне”, “впредь”. - “Господь там”. Более существенное обитание, чем ранее (ср. Иоил III:21), производящее небывалое благоденствие города (Ис LX:14, 22; LXII:2b) и не прекращаемое бесчестие имени Божия. - “Там”, евр. шамма - энергичнее и торжественнее, чем шам. Перемена имени - перемена всего существа. И “Иерусалим” знаменательное имя (по блаж. Иерониму, означает “видение мира”), новое же имя - превосходнее.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
48:35: The name of the city from that day shall be, The Lord is there - It would have been better to have retained the original words: -
יהוה שמה
Yehovah Shammah.
This is an allusion to the shechinah, or symbol of the Divine Presence, which was in the first, but most certainly was not in the second temple; but Ezekiel tells us that the Divine Presence should be in the city of which he speaks; and should be there so fully and so powerfully, that it should give name to the city itself; and that the very name, Jehovah shammah, should remind all men of the supereminently glorious Being who had condescended to make this city his habitation.
Two points must be considered here: -
1. That the prophet intended that, when they should be restored, they should build the temple, and divide the land as he here directs, if the thing could be found to be practicable.
2. That he had another temple, another holy city, another Promised Land, in view. The land of Immanuel, the city of the New Jerusalem; and his temple, the Christian Church, which is the house of the living God, Ti1 3:15, in which the presence of Christ shall ever be found; and all its inhabitants, all that believe on his name, shall be temples of the Holy Ghost. Nor can there be any reasonable doubt that the prophet here, by the Spirit of God, not only points out the return of the Israelites from the Babylonish captivity, and what was to befall them previously to the advent of Jesus Christ; but also the glorious spread of the Gospel in the earth, and the final conversion of the tribes of Israel by the preaching of that Gospel.
In conclusion, I think it necessary to state, that there are but few of the prophets of the Old Testament who have left a more valuable treasure to the Church of God than Ezekiel. It is true, he is in several places obscure; but there is a great proportion of the work that is in the highest degree edifying; and several portions that for the depth of the salvation predicted, and the accuracy and minuteness of the description, have nothing equal to them in the Old Testament Scriptures. On such portions, I have felt it my duty to be very particular, that I might be able to point out spiritual beauties and excellencies in this book which are beyond all praise; while I passed slightly over prophecies and symbols which I did not fully understand; but have left to time, by the fulfillment of the events, to prove to successive generations with what heavenly wisdom this much neglected prophet has spoken. And I take this opportunity to recommend this book to the serious perusal of every pious man; and while he wonders at the extent of the wisdom by which Ezekiel has fathomed the depth of so many Divine mysteries, let him give God the glory for this additional testimony to the unsearchable riches of Christ, and that plenary salvation which he has purchased for, and freely offers to, the vilest of the vile, and to the whole of the descendants of Adam.
Masoretic Notes
Number of verses, 1, 273.
Middle verse, Eze 26:1.
Masoretic sections, 29.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
48:35: The circuit of the city walls, a square of 4500 reeds, was 18, 000 reeds, not quite 37 English miles. The circuit of Jerusalem in the time of Josephus was reckoned by him to be about four miles.
The name ... - The manner of expressing a spiritual meaning by giving a name to a city, a people, or the like, is familiar to the prophets (see Eze 43:15 note). Jerome explains it: "The name of the city shall be no longer Jerusalem ("the vision of peace"), but Adonai-shama ("the Lord is there") (rather, Jehovah-shammah, "Jehovah is there"), because Yahweh will never again withdraw from it, as He once withdrew, but will hold it as His everlasting possession." The visible presence of God's glory, once represented in the tabernacle and in the temple, had departed, and should not return in the same form. Yet Ezekiel in "visions of God" sees a temple reconstructed to receive the glory of the divine presence, a prophetic vision fulfilled in Emmanuel ("God with us"), who tabernacled among men Joh 1:14. Compare Rom 9:25; Rev 21:2-3.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
48:35: and the name: Gen 22:14; Jer 33:16; Zac 14:21
The Lord: Heb. JEHOVAH shammah, Exo 15:26, Exo 17:15; Jdg 6:24; Psa 46:5, Psa 48:3, Psa 48:14, Psa 68:18, Psa 77:13, Psa 132:14; Isa 12:6, Isa 14:32, Isa 24:23; Jer 3:17; Joe 3:21; Zac 2:10; Rev 21:3, Rev 22:3
Next: Daniel Chapter 1
John Gill
48:35 It was round about eighteen thousand measures,.... Putting the numbers together which each side made, the circumference of the city was eighteen thousand measures; which, according to Cornelius a Lapide, were thirty two thousand miles; which shows that no city literally taken can be here meant, but mystically and spiritually the church of Christ, which will be of great extent in the latter day; and a large one it had need to be, to hold all nations that will flow into it; it will be spread all over the world; the world will become the church; the kingdoms of it will become Christ's; the little stone will become a great mountain, and fill the whole earth; the kingdom and interest of Christ, which is his church, will be from sea to sea, and from the river unto the ends of the earth; even from the rising of the sun to the setting of the same. Some Jewish writers (a), not knowing what to make of these large measures, say that they have respect to the eighteen thousand worlds God is said (b) to make, which these were a similitude, figure, or exemplar of; but those Jews are nearer the true sense of them, who say (c) that this is to be understood of Jerusalem above, or as it will be in future time, in the world to come, the dispensation of the Messiah, Gal 4:26,
and the name of the city from that day shall be, the Lord is there; the Gospel church has other names, as Jerusalem, Mount Zion, the Lord our righteousness, Hephzibah and Beulah, a city not forsaken, Heb 12:22, but here it is called "Jehovah Shammah", the Lord is there, or dwells there; which is to be understood of his presence in it; not in a general way, as he is in all places, and with all his creatures, continually, constantly, and everywhere working in a providential manner; but of his gracious presence in a special way and manner: in this sense Jehovah, Father, Son, and Spirit, are in the Gospel church, and will be more manifestly in the latter day; Jehovah the Father, as the Father of Christ, blessing them with all spiritual blessings in him; granting them his presence in him, and communion with him, through him; as their Father providing all good things for them, and as the God of all grace unto them: Jehovah the Son, as the master of the family taking care of it, as a son in his own house, and the first born among his brethren; as the prophet in the midst of his church, teaching and instructing; as the high priest in the midst of the golden candlesticks, lighting and trimming them; as the King in Zion, to rule and govern, protect and defend it; showing himself in all the glories of his person, and the riches of his grace, according to his promise, Mt 28:20. Jehovah the Spirit is here to qualify men with gifts for the ministry, to apply the word, and make it useful; as a Spirit of grace and supplication, and to help the Lord's people in the exercise of grace, and discharge of duty; and to be their comforter and remembrancer. Jehovah here does and will display his glorious perfections; his power in the preservation of his saints; his wisdom in the guidance and direction of them; his truth and faithfulness in the performance of promises to them; his purity and holiness in the sanctification of them; his love, grace, and mercy, in the large discoveries made unto them; in short, he will appear all glorious to them, and will be the glory in the midst of them, Ps 46:5, Zech 2:5 the date from whence this will commence is "that day"; either from the beginning of the Gospel dispensation, that famous day made by the rising of the sun of righteousness; or from the day and date of Christ's promise of his presence, Mt 28:20 or from the time the Gospel church state was set up; or from the day this city will be rebuilt and restored, the Lord will more visibly and manifestly grant his presence to the inhabitants of it, and never more depart from them; see Is 42:12, The Targum is,
"the name of the city which is separated from the day, the Lord will cause his Shechaniah to dwell there.''
The Jews (d) produce this place to show that Jerusalem is called Jehovah, and say, do not read Shammah, "there", but Shemah, "its name"; and the Socinians from hence would disprove the incommunicableness of the name Jehovah to a creature, but without effect; since this city is not called simply Jehovah, but with an additional epithet; and this is to be understood, not in a divided, but compound sense, as the altar in Ex 17:15, and the mount in Gen 22:14.
(a) Lipman. Tzurath Beth Hamikdash, sect. 79. (b) T. Bab. Avoda Zara, fol. 3. 2. (c) Gloss. in T. Bab. Sanhedrin, fol. 97. 2. & Succah, fol, 45. 8. (d) T. Bab. Bava Bathra, fol. 75. 2.
John Wesley
48:35 Eighteen thousand cubits - About five miles in compass. From that day - From the day of the Lord's restoring this people, and rebuilding their city, and their thankful, holy, and pure worshipping of God there, from that day it shall be said of Jerusalem. The Lord is there - The Lord who as his name alone is Jehovah, so is the only true God, faithful to his promise, rich in mercy, glorious in majesty, righteous in his judgments, wise and holy in his government, whose presence makes us happy, whose withdrawing from us leaves us to misery. This God will by his favour and presence, bring the confluence of all good to persons, families, and cities; this God will be there to dwell, govern, defend, prosper, and crown. Such is to be the case of earthly Jerusalem, such shall be for ever the case of the heavenly Jerusalem. Such is the case of every true believer, who may, wherever he is, in his way of duty, still write Jehovah - Shammah, My God is here. And 'tis best to be where he is 'till he bring us within the gates of the glorious city, where inconceivable light and love from the immediate presence of God, give every one an eternal demonstration that God is here: to him be glory for ever.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
48:35 Lord is there--Jehovah-Shammah. Not that the city will be called so in mere name, but that the reality will be best expressed by this descriptive title (Jer 3:17; Jer 33:16; Zech 2:10; Rev_ 21:3; Rev_ 22:3).